MAGNETOM

Planning Guide
System
Planning Guide for MAGNETOM ESSENZA - A Tim+Dot System
2 Document Version / Disclaimer / Copyright

Document Version
Siemens reserves the right to change its products and services at any time.
In addition, manuals are subject to change without notice. The hardcopy documents cor‐
respond to the version at the time of system delivery and/or printout. Versions to hard‐
copy documentation are not automatically distributed.
Please contact your local Siemens office to order a current version or refer to our website
[Link]

Disclaimer
Siemens provides this documentation “as is” without the assumption of any liability under
any theory of law.
The content described herein shall be used by qualified personnel who are employed by
Siemens or one of its affiliates or who are otherwise authorized by Siemens or its affiliates
to use such documents.
Assemblers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly affiliated
with or authorized by Siemens or one of its affiliates are not entitled to use this documen‐
tation without prior written authority.

Copyright
“© Siemens, 2007” refers to the copyright of a Siemens entity such as:
Siemens Healthcare GmbH - Germany
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft - Germany
Siemens Shenzhen Magnetic Resonance Ltd. - China
Siemens Shanghai Medical Equipment Ltd. - China
Siemens Healthcare Private Ltd. - India
Siemens Medical Solutions USA Inc. - USA
Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Inc. - USA and/or
Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Products GmbH - Germany

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 2 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Table of Contents 3

1 General information 7

1.1 Product specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1.1.1 Key Benefits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1.2 Key Feautures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.2.1 Link to “General Safety Information” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.2.2 Safety aspects for the Examination Room. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.2.3 Controlled access area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.2.4 Regulatory affairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.3 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.1 System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.4 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.4.1 Project Manager Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

2 Room planning 22

2.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

2.1.1 Product-specific remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.1.2 Legal regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.1.3 Requirements for room lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.1.4 Room technical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.2 Room sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.2.1 Minimum finished room size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.2.2 Room configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.3 Planning notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.4 Component dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.4.1 Magnet system complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.4.2 Electronics Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.4.3 RF Filter Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.4.4 Operating console components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.4.5 Alarm box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.4.6 Magnet Stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.4.7 ICS-passive (standard configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.4.8 ICS-active (optional configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2.5 Magnetic field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.5.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.5.2 Interferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.5.3 Fringe field distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.6 Magnetic shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.7 Co-Siting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.7.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.7.2 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.8 Building vibration specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2.8.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2.8.2 Vibration specification diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
2.8.3 Decision matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2.9 Noise emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 3 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
4 Table of Contents

2.9.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

2.9.2 Noise emission values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2.10 Static requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
2.10.1 Area requirements and floor loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
2.10.2 Center of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2.10.3 Earthquake prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

3 Preparation for installation 99

3.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

3.1.1 Installation and service tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.1.2 Medical Accessories and Supplies for Siemens Modalities . . . . . . 99
3.1.3 Cooperation Partner/Supplier List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.2 Component installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.2.1 Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.3 Cable inlets/Hose inlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
3.4 Cable conduits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3.5 On-site electrical installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
3.5.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
3.5.2 On-site power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3.5.3 On-site power distribution panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
3.5.4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
3.5.5 Customer RF filter connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
3.5.6 Alarm contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
3.6 On-site water installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
3.6.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
3.6.2 Primary water specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3.7 On-site air conditioning installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3.7.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3.7.2 Climate conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3.8 RF shielding enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3.8.1 RF room manufacturer's information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3.8.2 RF room prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3.8.3 Attenuation specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
3.8.4 RF filter plate cut-out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
3.8.5 RF room isolation from on-site ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
3.8.6 Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
3.9 Quench Line Design Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
3.9.1 Quench Line Design Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
3.9.2 Deflector Plate Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
3.9.3 Mobile Systems Quench Line Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

4 System connections 262

4.1 SRS connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

4.2 Cable properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
4.2.1 Bending radius. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
4.2.2 Cable separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
4.2.3 Door switches at the RF room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 4 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Table of Contents 5

4.3 List of fix points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

4.3.1 System cable connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
4.3.2 System water hose connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
4.3.3 System pressurized helium hose connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

5 Technical data 286

5.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

5.1.1 General classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
5.1.2 Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
5.1.3 Air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
5.1.4 Primary water specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
5.1.5 RF shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
5.1.6 Noise emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

6 Transport and Storage conditions 289

6.1 Transport and storage specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

6.1.1 Mechanical transport conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
6.2 Transport route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
6.2.1 Requirements for the transport route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
6.3 Transport dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
6.3.1 Overview of Shipping dimensions of the components . . . . . . . . . 294
6.3.2 Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
6.3.3 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
6.4 Weights and dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

7 Options 312

7.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

7.2 UPS system PW 9130G 3000T-XLEU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
7.2.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
7.2.2 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
7.2.3 Order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
7.2.4 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
7.3 In-room MRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
7.3.1 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
7.3.2 Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
7.3.3 For planning purposes, the following are important: . . . . . . . . . . 326
7.4 Patient supervision unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
7.4.1 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
7.4.2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
7.5 Stepping transformer for Passive Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
7.5.1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
7.5.2 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

8 Mobile-specific requirements 334

8.1 Health & Safety Guidelines for Mobile Serviceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

8.1.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
8.1.2 Typical Service Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 5 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
6 Table of Contents

8.1.3 Roof Hatch Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

8.1.4 Further Safety & Serviceability Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
8.2 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
8.3 Project Management of the MRI system into mobile trailers . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
8.4 Mobile Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
8.4.1 Controlled area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
8.4.2 Magnet Quench Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
8.4.3 Oxygen Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
8.4.4 Non-magnetic materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
8.4.5 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
8.4.6 Personnel service access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
8.4.7 Fixation of local coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
8.5 Mobile System Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
8.5.1 Mobile system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
8.6 Mobile Specific System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
8.6.1 ESSENZA Mobile Magnet Conversion Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
8.6.2 Unique Mobile components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
8.6.3 Magnet cover for mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
8.6.4 E-Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
8.7 Trailer design and construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
8.7.1 Trailer construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
8.7.2 Type Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
8.8 Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
8.8.1 Specific Mobile Environmental Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
8.9 On-site preparations for the use of a Mobile MRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
8.9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
8.9.2 Topographic specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
8.9.3 Service access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
8.9.4 Support pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
8.9.5 On-site environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

9 Changes to previous version 390

10 List of Hazard IDs 391

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 6 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 General information 1 7

1.1 Product specific information

1.1.1 Key Benefits

Key Benefits:
n Higher patient comfort due to light-weight coils, ultra-short magnet design, and fast
exam
n Optimized workflow and increased consistency – with Dot
n Excellent life-cycle value from day one through low installation and operating costs
n Greater clinical scope with head-to-to applications
n Diagnostic confidence through remarkable, consistent image

1.1.2 Key Feautures

More productivity. With Tim+Dot.
n Tim [25x8] or Tim [46x16]
n Outstanding Tim coil portfolio
n Dot: Imaging with ease and perfection.
More applications. From head to toe.
n Comprehensive Tim Application Suite
n Further extended with applications like CAIPIRINHA
n Access to innovative applications like syngo RESOLVE
More confidence. Through sustainable value.
n Brand-new syngo MR D14 platform
n Faster break-even with Tim+Dot
n Performance and reliability proven by more than 1000 installations

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 7 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
8 1 General information

1.2 Safety Information

 The safety notes are supplemented by specific descriptions in the documents sup‐
plied by Siemens Medical Solutions, e.g., product documents, ARTD (general
guidelines) as well as by written instructions in specific cases. All safety instruc‐
tions have to be observed when performing work activities and tests; in addition,
compliance with prescribed country-specific requirements has to be ensured (e.g.
occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).


Read these pages carefully and comply with the safety informations!
Read the documents “General Safety” and “MR Specific Safety”.


Consult the “MR-specific Safety Information” on the CB-Doc for this product!
Consult the “General Safety Information” on the CB-Doc for this product!

1.2.1 Link to “General Safety Information”

( General Safety Notes / TD00-000.860.01)

1.2.2 Safety aspects for the Examination Room

 CAUTION
Introduction of ferromagnetic parts / spare parts into the examination room.
Metal parts, ferromagnetic parts and spare parts can be magnetic pulled!
 The planning of MR-suites with only one single door for having access to the
equipment room through the examination room prohibited. If direct access to
the equipment room via the magnet room is required, the equipment room
shall be equipped with a second door accessible without passing the magnet
room!

It must be possible to lock the RF-room (examination room) door from the outside.

 In addition to that it must always be possible to open the RF-door without a key or addi‐
tional devices in any cases from the inside!

Since the RF-door is an important component for a good image quality and also for safe‐


ty aspects, the customer/user of the MR-system has to be informed to maintain the
maintenance intervals given by the RF room manufacturer.
This will guarantee a correct function of the RF-door.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 8 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 General information 1 9

The Siemens Healthcare Project Manager is responsible for the MR-system until turn-over
to the customer.
The Project Manager has to ensure that no magnetic parts/materials can be brought into


the examination room between the Start-Up (magnet is ramped up to field) and the cus‐
tomer application training phase (there is the possibility to have some days inbetween)!
This can be acchieved e.g. with locking the RF-door.
The customer has to be informed in writing about the risks generated by the magnetic
field!

State of the art ferromagnetic metal detectors might be able to reduce the likelihood of
projectile accidents.
Siemens recommends the use of such detectors, because magnet forces accidents still
are a significant source of danger. It is the local project management together with the


customer to decide about the purchase and installation of such detector systems.
In order to optimize the deployment and set-up, it is necessary to consider the installa‐
tion in an early phase in site preparation.
Ferromagnetic detector systems recommended by Siemens Healthcare can be found in
the SIEMENS accessories catalogue ( Accessories-Cata‐
logue, [Link]

[Link] Sign for bruising hazards

If the distance from the fully extended patient table from the service end to the back
 wall is less than 500 mm, a label or warning sign has to be installed to identify the haz‐
ardous area. This can be done e.g. with a color-coordinated tape attached to the floor.

 The bruising hazard sign must be posted in back of the patient table if the distance be‐
tween patient table and back wall is less than 500 mm.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 9 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
10 1 General information

Fig. 1: Bruising hazard sign

Fig. 2: Bruising hazard label

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 10 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 General information 1 11

Fig. 3: Service end area

(1) Marking on the floor

(2) Patient table
(3) Wall of the RF room

1.2.3 Controlled access area

The project manager has to inform the customer to protect the controlled access area
(0.5mT) with the delivered warning signs. All doors leading into the 0.5mT area must be
identified/protected with a warning sign. The project manager provides the customer

 with the position of the 0.5mT line based on, e.g., a table from the planning guide that
shows the distances or the customer site drawings that indicate the 0.5mT line. The
warning sign “cardiac pacemaker” is, e.g., for identifying the 0.5mT line. The warning
sign “strong magnetic field” is, e.g., for identifying the entrance doors into the examina‐
tion room or the 0.5mT line.

Prior starting up the magnet system make sure that the warning labels are posted!

 The warning labels are available in different languages. Pick the correct language and
the correct field strength ( 1/Fig. 4 Page 12), ( 1/Fig. 5 Page 12). The following
pictures are examples.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 11 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
12 1 General information

 WARNING
Strong magnetic field
Error to observe the following Safety Information may result in physical injury
and equipment damage.
 Ensure that the warning labels identifying the controlled access area (0.5 mT
zone) have been posted at the entrance to the RF room as well as all other
areas leading to the 0.5 mT zone.
 The sign has to be posted in a way that it is visible even when the door to the
controlled area is opened!

 The following warning signs are part of the delivery volume.

Fig. 4: Warning sign 1.5T Fig. 5: Warning sign 3T

1 1

(1) Field strength

(1) Field strength

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 12 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 General information 1 13

Fig. 6: Caution label “Pacemaker”

For MR EQUIPMENT that generates a stray field exceeding 0.5 mT outside its permanently
attached cover and/or an electromagnetic interference level that does not comply with
IEC 60601-1-2 the technical description
n will indicate the necessity to define and permanently install a CONTROLLED AC‐
CESS AREA around the MR EQUIPMENT such that outside this area
a) the magnetic fringe field strength will not exceed 0.5 mT and
b) the electromagnetic interference level complies with IEC 60601-1-2
n will give clear recommendations as to how this CONTROLLED ACCESS AREA will be de‐
limited, e.g. by markings on the floor, barriers and/or other means to allow the re‐
sponsible staff to adequately control access to this area by unauthorized persons; and
n the CONTROLLED ACCESS AREA must be labeled at all entries using the warning signs
provided, including indication of the presence of magnetic fields and their force or
torque on ferromagnetic materials.
When the MR EQUIPMENT is designed for installation in a room in which audio visual con‐
tact to the PATIENT is likely to be limited, the technical descriptions will specify provisions
in the design of the room and in the EQUIPMENT to enable audio and visual contact with
the PATIENT during the MR EXAMINATION. The audio visual contact will be sufficient not
to hamper the possible need for MEDICAL SUPERVISION of the PATIENT.
When the installation of a CONTROLLED ACCESS AREA is required for the MR EQUIPMENT,
the INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
n will state clearly that it is the responsibility of the USER to follow local statutory re‐
quirements with respect to access to the CONTROLLED ACCESS AREA;
n will specify, preferably accompanied by a sketch, the size and shape of the CONTROL‐
LED ACCESS AREA;
n will indicate the need to establish adequate rules for controlling access to the CON‐
TROLLED ACCESS AREA in terms of the potential risk to PATIENTS and staff within the
CONTROLLED ACCESS AREA from the attraction of objects containing iron or other
magnetically active materials or from torque on such metallic materials and the poten‐
tial risk to persons inadvertently entering the area who may be affected by the possi‐
ble malfunction of medical implants such a pacemakers;

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 13 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
14 1 General information

 For magnetic field strengths less than 0.5 mT, no administrative controls are required.

n will list EQUIPMENT and tools specified or recommended by the MANUFACTURER for
use in the CONTROLLED ACCESS AREA. For all EQUIPMENT, ACCESSORIES or tools lis‐
ted, a description should be given of special measures that are needed, if any, for its
installation as well as special precautions, if any, for their use;
n will state clearly that peripheral equipment, including PATIENT monitoring, life sup‐
porting devices and emergency care equipment, which are not specified or recom‐
mended for use in the CONTROLLED ACCESS AREA, may be disturbed by the radio fre‐
quency field or the magnetic fringe field of the MR EQUIPMENT and that this peripher‐
al equipment may also disturb the proper function of the MR EQUIPMENT.

1.2.4 Regulatory affairs

[Link] Installation and regulations

Tab. 1 Installation notes and regulations

Designation Description
All work n as a rule the applicable country guidelines need to be observed!
n in addition applicable local regulations set by the authorities
have to be observed!

Floor mounting needs to be performed according to country-specific guidelines in

of all system countries prone to earthquakes.
components
Weight capacity have the concrete flooring or composite flooring tested by a stress
analyst.

[Link] Envirnonment protection

 Refer to the latest version of the Disposal Instructions

The transport packing materials, e.g. all port pallet, have to be taken back by the service


provider!
All the other packing materials e.g. paper board containers , can be disposed as required
by local codes.

[Link] Pressure Equipment Directive

 Local national laws, codes, regulations and procedures must be maintained.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 14 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 General information 1 15

The magnet qualifies as pressure equipment. When starting up and during the operating
of pressure equipment, national regulations have to be [Link] Europe, the Pressure
Equipment Directive (97/23/EU) regulates the introduction to market of pressure equip‐
[Link] Germany, the Pressure Equipment Directive as well as the "Betriebsicherheitsver‐
ordnung" (BetrSichV)(Industrial Safety Regulations) apply to system start-up and opera‐
tion. The BetrSichV stipulates that prior to start-up the user or others must perform a final
acceptance test consisting of inspection of documentation, safety equipment, and instal‐
lation. Periodic inspections of the cryostat are not required. However, periodic internal
tests and periodic strength tests are mandatory, if the equipment is taken out of opera‐
tion for maintenance or repair work.

Declaration of Conformity
 The declaration of Conformity is delivered together with the magnet documenta‐
tion.
The CSE, ISE or factory installation member which is performing the initial installation of
the system has to add the “Declaration of Conformity” to the “System Owner Manual”,
Register 6, Certificates.
The “Declaration of Conformity” is important for the customer in several countries for ac‐
ceptance inspections by e.g. the government or any technical inspection authority.

[Link] Environmental protection

 Refer to the latest version of the Disposal Instructions

The transport packing materials, e.g. all port pallets, have to be taken back by the service


provider!
All the other packing materials, e.g., paper board container can be disposed as required
by local codes.

[Link] Pressure Equipment Directive

 Local national laws, codes, regulations and procedures have to be maintained.

The magnet qualifies as pressure equipment. When starting up and during the operating
of pressure equipment, national regulations have to be observed. In Europe, the Pressure
Equipment Directive (97/23/EU) regulates the market introduction of pressure equip‐
[Link] Germany, the Pressure Equipment Directive as well as the "Betriebsicherheitsver‐
ordnung" (BetrSichV)(Industrial Safety Regulations) apply to system start-up and opera‐
tion. The BetrSichV stipulates that prior to start-up, the user or others must perform a fi‐
nal acceptance test consisting of the inspection of the documentation, safety equipment,
and installation. Periodic inspections of the cryostat are not required. However, periodic
internal tests and periodic strength tests are mandatory, if the equipment is taken out of
operation for maintenance or repair work.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 15 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
16 1 General information

1.3 System configuration

1.3.1 System Components

Fig. 7: System Component Configuration with ICS-passive (Standard)

Magnet and patient table

Alarm Box

Console

RF penetration plate

ECA ICS-passive

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 16 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 General information 1 17

Fig. 8: System Component Configuration with ICS-active (Option)

Magnet and patient table

Alarm Box

Console

RF penetration plate

ECA ICS-active

External Fan Unit

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 17 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
18 1 General information

[Link] Magnet
( Function / Page 39)

[Link] System electronics cabinet (ECA)

( Function / Page 51)

[Link] RF filter plate

( Function / Page 55)

[Link] Alarm box

( Function / Page 59)

[Link] MRC console

The MRC console consists of the HOST PC, monitor, keyboard and mouse used to operate
the MR system. In addition, an intercom is part of the console electronics.

[Link] ICS-Active (Optional configuration)

( Function / Page 64)

[Link] ICS-Passive (Standard configuration)

( Function / Page 62)

[Link] Integrated components

Whole-body gradient system

In addition to the basic magnetic field, the whole-body gradient system generates linear
dynamic magnetic field gradients in the three room orientations. The whol- body gradient
system includes the gradient amplifier and the gradient coil.

RF system
The RF system generates the RF fields and transmits them to the patient (transmit func‐
tion). It also receives the MR signals emitted by the patient and provides them in digital
format for image reconstruction (receive system).

RF coils
The system includes a whole-body coil for emitting RF to the patient and for receiving MR
signals from the patient. The tune box which adjusts the resonator to the performance
amplifier as a function of frequency and load as well as the connection cables to these
units are part of the body coil. The support tube of the body coil also functions as the in‐
ner cover of the magnet tunnel.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 18 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 General information 1 19

RF local coils improve image quality when examining specific body regions.

Patient handling
Prior to the MR examination, the patient is positioned on the table using the positioning
accessories for additional comfort. During the examination, the patient is monitored ac‐
cordingly, e.g. via video camera. The system handling function covers all requirements
and includes the patient table, lighting, ventilation, and patient monitoring.
Since the patient is usually alone in the examination room during the measurements, pa‐
tient and medical personnel communicate via the intercom. The intercom includes the
configurations necessary in the examination room and the operating console as well as
the cabling.
Whenever required, the patient is monitored during the examination via a video camera.
The setup consists of the camera, the monitor, as well as the cabling.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 19 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
20 1 General information

1.4 Notes

1.4.1 Project Manager Information

[Link] Requirements for Planning

Information given in this document applies to the planning stage only. Detailed informa‐
tion is part of the final site-specific plan obtained from the Siemens Planning Department.
Site preparation is the customer's responsibility. SIEMENS AG is only responsible for instal‐
lation and commissioning of the ordered equipment.

[Link] Project management

 The infrastructure and the site preparation (e.g. availability of power, water, air condi‐
tioning etc.) has to be finished prior to system arrival.

High priority must be given to preparing the site for a trouble-free reading!

 This means ensuring that the system components can be installed and connected as
soon as possible to achieve a customer- orientated installation time and to reduce the
amount of liquid helium boil off during the installation process.

For each project, the actual data/information and the Planning Guides have to be used!

 It is the responsibility of the Project Manager to check the Intranet for the latest version
of the Planning Guide.

[Link] Service and Installation

 Information regarding service and installation tools can be found in the following
link: ( Sevice_Tool_List, [Link]
startfolder=961cdcb4da5da085a64d90de6b69c052)

Installation

The transportation, mechanical installation and cabling of the system and system com‐
ponents have to be performed by trained personnel of our dedicated service providers


only.
The system installation, e.g., tune-up and start-up will be performed by the US Installa‐
tion team, the Erlangen Factory Installation team, SSMR Factory installation team or the
HSC team Erlangen.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 20 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 General information 1 21

All transport locking devices, e.g., the red metal beams on top of the ACC cabinet or the


aluminium mounting blocks for the magnet, have to be stored on-site.
The reason for this is the possibility of future location changes or removing/transporting
the system.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 21 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
22 2 Room planning

2.1 General information

When planning the MR suite, the following circumstances can influence the suitability of
the site:
n Interference generated by the magnet
n Interference affecting the magnet
n Site preparation
n Installation quality
n Noise emission
n Load capacity
n Minimum door height
n Minimum room height
n Cable routing
n Installation quality
n Air conditioning
n Chilled water supply
n Power supply
n Reinforcement steel
n Iron shielding
n RF shielding

2.1.1 Product-specific remarks

n.a.

2.1.2 Legal regulations

n.a.

2.1.3 Requirements for room lighting

Either AC-lights or DC-lights can be installed inside the examination room!

 Fluorescent lighting and energy saving lighting must not be installed inside the examina‐
tion room!

[Link] Intensity of illumination

The most important factors with respect to good lighting are the brightness level and
light density which should result in reflection-free presentation and uniformity. Those pa‐
rameters must be adjustable.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 22 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 23

The room lighting fixtures should be divided into groups so that they can be adjusted to
daylight conditions.

 The planning of the illumination and position of, e.g., monitors should be performed in
reference to DIN V 6868-57 (Germany) or other country-related codes and guidelines.

In reference to DIN V 6868-57, the illumination in rooms equipped with, e.g., monitors
for diagnoses has to fulfill the following requirements:
n adjustable
n non-dazzling
n reproducible adjustment of the illumination density
n no reflections from windows, lamps, display cabinets in the normal operation posi‐
tion, e.g., of the monitor.

[Link] Display screen workstations

The special requirements to be met by the human eye when working with image screen
workstations are, for example, rapid image or text displays. An expert in room lighting
should be consulted when determining the physical location of the MR monitors and the
seating arrangement for the operator. Of special importance is the location of windows
(daylight) and illumination with respect to the screen.
For setting up display screen workstations, take into account the guidelines in the Display
Screen Workstation Directive as well as any national regulations!

[Link] Planning
(Power socket in the examination room)
Hazardous conditions are created by the magnetic field when connecting devices made
from magnetizable material to the receptacles installed in the examination room. In addi‐
tion, the functionality of electrical devices, e.g. servo ventilators, may be affected by the
magnetic field if the devices are not suitable for this type of operation. The user is respon‐
sible for the installation and use of receptacles in the examination room as well as for
damages caused by the above mentioned use. In addition, the on-site electrical system
has to conform to Group 2, if life-supporting systems are used in the examination room.
Sockets inside the examination room must be connected through extra RF filters and an
insulation transformer if Group 2 is required.
Reflections from light sources or daylight (windows) lead to completely false contrast and
brightness settings on the MR monitor. Since the images and texts displayed on-screen
are the basis for photographic documentation, the quality of images from this source will
be negatively influenced. Equally important for optimal image quality on the MR monitor
and thus for the most fatigue-free working conditions are such factors as reflection and
glare, light density, and adequate illumination strength.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 23 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
24 2 Room planning

Room lighting in the examination room

The magnetic field adversely affects the operating life of light bulbs located in the imme‐
diate vicinity of the magnet. The filament in the light bulb oscillates with the frequency of
the power supply. It is therefore recommended to connect light fixtures in the vicinity of
the magnet to a DC voltage supply. If room lighting is supplied with DC voltage, correct
polarity of the sockets should be ensured during their installation. Residual AC ripple
should be 5%. Phase light dimmers must not be used.

AC voltage
Only lamps without phase angle control should be used.

DC voltage
The magnetic field adversely affects the operating life of light bulbs located in the imme‐
diate vicinity of the magnet. The filament in the light bulb oscillates with the frequency of
the power supply. Light fixtures in the vicinity of the magnet connected to a DC voltage
supply can reduce this effect. If room lighting is supplied with DC voltage, correct polarity
of the sockets should be ensured during their installation.
Residual DC ripple should be ≤ 5%.
Fig. 9: DC-Lamp Socket

[Link] Reflections, glare

Glare considerably impairs the work performed on-screen. Direct glare due to lamps or il‐
lumination as well as various kinds of reflected glare should be prevented. Appropriate
planning is therefore highly important.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 24 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 25

[Link] Examination room

The magnetic field adversely affects the operating life of light bulbs located in the
 immediate vicinity of the magnet. The filament in the light bulb oscillates with the
frequency of the power supply.

Either AC-lights or DC-lights can be installed in the examination room.

 Lights are not allowed above the magnet.

Fluorescent lighting and energy saving lights must not be installed inside the examina‐
tion room.

Recommendation
Light sources should be installed as follows:
n The groups of lamps in the examination room are switched on/off with the main
switch in the control room.
n The set of lamps above the patient table is controlled via a switch in the examination
room.
n The set of lamps next to the patient table is controlled via a second switch in the ex‐
amination room.

2.1.4 Room technical equipment

[Link] Fire extinguisher

 Only non-magnetic fire extinguishers must be used inside the Examination Room.

[Link] Smoke detector

 Smoke detectors, if required, should be installed in the air conditioning system.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 25 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
26 2 Room planning

2.2 Room sizes

2.2.1 Minimum finished room size

Room planning for MR systems has to be based on the minimum technical room sizes
specified for safety and installation purposes.

 To service the magnet (e.g., coldhead, current probe, etc.), the minimum finished room
height must be guaranteed and not blocked with e.g. air conditioning ducts, cable ducts
etc.

The minimum finished room height measures from the finished floor to the finished
(e.g., suspended) ceiling. The minimum finished room length and width measures from
finished wall to finished wall.
 The minimum dimensions provided present the minimum technical requirements.
It is the decision of the customer to increase these dimensions.
The available cable sets are setting the limits of room sizes.

Minimum finished room sizes

Height Width Length Area in m²
Examination room (Minimum
2400 mm 3500 mm 5420 mm 1 18.9 m²
size)
Examination room size with
1000 mm space in each direction 2400 mm 4300 mm 5920 mm 2 25.5 m²
(example only)
Control room 2100 mm 1500 mm 1900 mm 2.9 m²
2200 mm 1776 mm 3 1000 mm 2.9 m² 4
Equipment room
2200 mm 1976 mm 5 1020 mm 3.3 m² 6
Outdoor space (ICS-active only) 950 mm 1575 mm 1145 mm 5.5 m² 7

1. The safety clearance of 500 mm can be reduced by introducing the required safety actions.
2. Recommendation only
3. ECA + ICS-passive
4. ECA + ICS Passive including Service area
5. ECA + ICS-active
6. ECA + ICS-active including Service area
7. Including 500 mm Service area in each direction

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 26 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 27

Tab. 2 Recommended distances

Magnet service side to Magnet right side to Patient table fully extended to
wall wall front wall
Standard Minimum Standard Minimum Standard Minimum
1000 mm 600 mm 1000 mm 600 mm 1000 mm 1 500 mm 2

1. 1000mm with the “Patient Table Trolley” option

2. Standard

Tab. 3 Minimum distance to the wall

Distances to the rear wall

Patient table extends beyond the magnet table support cover 310 mm
Required minimum distance from the magnet isocenter to the back 1850 mm
wall
Required minimum distance from the rear magnet table support 810 mm
cover to the back wall

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 27 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
28 2 Room planning

Fig. 10: Minimum Examination Room

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 28 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 29

Fig. 11: Recommended Examination Room Size

 To service the magnet (e.g., cold head, current probe, etc.), the minimum finished
room height must be guaranteed.

 If, e.g., noise damping has to be built into the RF room, take the size of the noise damp‐
ing into consideration to achieve the min. finished room sizes!

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 29 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
30 2 Room planning

Patient monitoring: If the patient cannot be observed (visually) through an RF window

 because of restrictions in the room layout, the option “Patient Supervision Unit” must be
included in the room planning. Audible contact with the patient is provided via the built-
in intercom system (e.g. loudspeaker, pneumatic headphones).

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 30 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 31

2.2.2 Room configuration example

Fig. 12: Example of Room Layout; Top View

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 31 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
32 2 Room planning

Fig. 13: Example of Room Layout; Front View

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 32 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 33

Fig. 14: Example of Room Layout; Side View

The possibility of refilling the magnet with liquid helium has to be guaranteed. As a re‐


sult, space has to be provided for the helium dewars.
The min. distance between patient table and RF cabin wall has to be suitable for He-
dewars.

The RF room door has to be opened to the outside, if this is not possible, e.g., due to
 building restrictions, consult the register RF-Shielding Enclosure for details ( RF shield‐
ing enclosure / Page 175).

Ensure that no cable ducts, light fittings, air conditioning ducts or any other component

 are installed above the cold head and the helium syphon port.
Keep these areas clear of any components.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 33 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
34 2 Room planning

[Link] RF Filter Panel

Recommended installation
Fig. 15: ACC/GPA location in relation to the RF-filter plate

(1) ACC/GPA
(3) RF-room

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 34 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 35

Alternative installation
Due to the building requirements or other circumstances, it may be necessary to install
the RF filter plate in other positions.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 35 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
36 2 Room planning

Fig. 16: RF-filter plate at ACC/GPA height

(1) ACC/GPA
(5) Minimum distance of ACC/GPA to RF-room if (6) is 1870 mm or lower
(6) RF-filter plate height example
(7) The 1.5 m cable kit will cover this configuration. If the distance (5) is more than 850 mm, the next longer cable kit has to be used.
(8) The minimum distance of 200 mm to the ceiling is to achieve the bending radius of the gradient cables.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 36 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 37

 The electronic cabinet could also be positioned either to the left or right side of the filter
plate. A longer cable set has to be ordered for this configuration.

Fig. 17: Low RF-filter plate installation

(1) GPA/ACC cabinet

(2) RF-filter plate
(3) RF-room
(7) Cable kit > 1.5 m

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 37 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
38 2 Room planning

2.3 Planning notes

n.a.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 38 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 39

2.4 Component dimensions

2.4.1 Magnet system complete

[Link] Function
The magnet system generates the basic magnetic field. The electrical and mechanical
shim are integrated in the gradient coil. The magnet comprises the superconductive mag‐
net including the system for cooling (interface for helium fill/refill, coldhead), energizing
(current probe) and monitoring the magnet during operation. In addition, it includes the
cabling up to the point where the external lines are connected.

[Link] Technical data

Tab. 4 Magnet and component weight

Magnet type MAGNETOM ESSENZA

Magnet with 100% of helium ~ 3150 kg
Gradient coil ~ 600 kg
Body coil ~ 100 kg
RF components + carrier plate ~ 150 kg
Patient table ~ 120 kg
Cover + frame ~ 180 kg
Total weight approx. 4350 kg

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 39 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
40 2 Room planning

[Link] Dimensions

Fig. 18: Magnet dimension of ESSENZA Dot (Front view)

Magnet bore
Magnet length 1310 mm
Magnet bore diameter 1 600 mm
Inner tunnel length 1030 mm
Length of flared opening 280 mm
System length 1470 mm

1. Including shim coils, gradient coil, RF body coil

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 40 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 41

Fig. 19: Magnet with PTAB dimension of ESSENZA Dot (Left view)

Tab. 5 Magnet dimensions with patient table and cover

Height 2179 mm
Length 4107 mm
Width 2310 mm

 The min. finished ceiling height for removal of cold head and He syphon is 2400mm.

Patient Table
Vertical patient table movement 1 550 mm to 890 mm
Longitudinal table movement 2055 mm
Maximum speed for longitudinal travel 200 mm/s
Maximum scan range “Standard” 1400 mm

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 41 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
42 2 Room planning

Patient Table
Patient table exceeds patient table support at the rear 310 mm
Maximum patient weight 200 kg

1. Optional

Magnet without cover

Fig. 20: Magnet view on patient end

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 42 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 43

Fig. 21: Magnet view on service end

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 43 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
44 2 Room planning

Fig. 22: Magnet view on service side

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 44 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 45

Fig. 23: Magnet side view

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 45 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
46 2 Room planning

Fig. 24: Magnet Footprint

Tab. 6 Magnet dimensions

Height 2089 mm
Length 1472 mm
Width 2133 mm

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 46 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 47

[Link] Quench Vent connection

Fig. 25: Quench Vent connection

(1) Combined turret assy

(2) CLMC Turret outer assy
(3) CLMC service entry assy
(4) Quench valve and elbow assy
(5) Interface elbow assy

 The distance from the finished floor to the flange surface of the 90 elbow is approxi‐
mately 2090 mm.

[Link] Magnet positioning

Stop-Chock spring configuration

 The Stop-Chock spring configuration is considered to be the standard positioning
solution.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 47 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
48 2 Room planning

[Link] Patient Table

 The patient table is not mounted to the magnet during transport and delivery!

Tab. 7 Patient table dimensions

Height 918 mm
Length 2426 mm
Width 1066 mm
Weight 120 kg

Fig. 26: Patient table "ISO view"

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 48 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 49

Fig. 27: Patient table "Top view"

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 49 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
50 2 Room planning

Fig. 28: Patient table "Side view"

Fig. 29: Patient table "front view"

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 50 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 51

2.4.2 Electronics Cabinet

[Link] Function
The system electronics cabinet (ECA) includes the power distribution component, RFPA,
GPA, imager, magnet monitoring, RF electronics.
The system electronics cabinet plus the IEC-passive or active cabinet can be installed one
floor above or one floor below the magnet room level. In this case, it is important to in‐
stall the IEC cabinet in close vicinity of the ECA electronics cabinet.

The ECA cabinet and either the ICS-passive (standard) or ICS-active (optional) are moun‐

 ted together.
The position of the ECA cabinet is in any case to the left!

[Link] Technical data

Tab. 8 ECA cabinet

ECA only ECA including:

ICS-passive (Standard) ICS-active (Optional)
Height 1990 mm 1990 mm
Depth 653 mm 653 mm
Width 957 mm 1761 mm 1961 mm
Weight 750 kg 1030 kg 1185 kg

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 51 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
52 2 Room planning

[Link] Dimensions

Fig. 30: ECA cabinet

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 52 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 53

Service area
To facilitate service, ensure that the following service area is provided.

Service Area ECA-ICS-passive

 ICS-passive is the standard configuration.

Tab. 9 Service areas; Component areas

Footprints
ECA ICS-passive Service area Total required area
0.625m² 0.535m² 1.776m² 2.936m²

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 53 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
54 2 Room planning

Fig. 31: Minimum required service area; ICS-passive, standard configuration

Service area ECA-ICS-active

 ICS-active is an option.

Tab. 10 Service areas; Component areas

Footprints
ECA ICS-active Service area Total required area
0.625m² 0.665m² 2.015m² 3.305m²

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 54 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 55

Fig. 32: Minimum require service area; ICS-active

2.4.3 RF Filter Panel

[Link] Function
The RF filter plate is the interface from the electronics cabinet / equipment room to the RF
room. All electrical signals must be filtered to prevent interferences.
For customer-specific options, separate RF filters have to be installed.
The RF filter panel is equipped with additional filters for Siemens use only.

[Link] Technical data

Tab. 11 RF penetration panel

Height 550 mm
Depth 816 mm
Length 1179 mm

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 55 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
56 2 Room planning

Heat dissipation to air 250.0 W

Limit value for magnetic flux density for operating safety 10.0 mT
Installation position vertical 1or horizontally.
Weight 130.0 kg

1. If the RF filter plate will be installed in the vertical position, the gradient filters have to be located on top

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 56 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 57

[Link] Dimensions

Fig. 33: RF filter panel

If you want to install a cover inside the examination room (not part of the delivery)
 around the RF filter panel, observe a minimum distance of 500 mm to allow for proper
cabling.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 57 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
58 2 Room planning

 Materials (e.g., screws, nuts and bolts) for mounting the RF filter plate to the RF room
have to be purchased locally.

 RF filters must be provided for smoke detectors in the examination room, if required.

2.4.4 Operating console components

[Link] Siemens Color Display

Technical data
100V...230V AC
Weight 10 kg Line voltage
+/-10V
Height 465 mm
Width 430 mm Monitor foot 240 mm
Depth 20 mm
Heat dissipation Frequency 47Hz / 0.65 Hz
Audible noise < 35 dB(A) Power consumption 75 W

 There is no measurable effect of the magnetic field on the monitor outside the RF room.

[Link] MRC Host computer

Technical data
Weight ≤ 22 kg
Heat dissipation to air ≤ 700 W
Power consumption 654 VA
Limit value for magnetic flux density for operating safety max. 1.0 mT
Height 460 mm
Width 280 mm
Depth 685 mm

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 58 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 59

The Host computer has to be positioned at the MRC console.

 The free cable length between Host PC and ACC cabinet is 23.0 m.
The connection for the modem is located in back of the Host PC, as is the network con‐
nection.

[Link] MRC console components

Item no. Component name Size (L x W x H) in mm

1 Host PC 280 x 685 x 460
2 Line distribution 330 x 45 x 50
3 Intercom 320 x 210 x 55
4 Serial distribution 250 x 160 x 40
5 Switch (1) 210 x 120 x 40
6 Switch (2; only if option MRSC is available) 210 x 120 x 40

 If the console table is not part of the delivery, the components (item 1 to 5) have to be
installed, e.g. on the wall, in close vicinity to the Host PC (item 6).

2.4.5 Alarm box

[Link] Function
The alarm box used in conjunction with the MAGNETOM ESSENZA magnet supervisory
unit is designed to indicate the general condition of the MRI magnet system. Operation of
the red emergency stop button while connected to the supervisory unit will cause the
Emergency Rundown Unit to apply power to the switch and quench heaters. The fringe
field may affect the functions of devices operated in the vicinity of the magnet.
The following features are provided:
n Emergency Stop button.
n System control with "lockout" keyswitch.
n Acoustic and visual alarm indication with alarm silence push-button.
 For MAGNETOM systems containing superconductive magnets or resistive mag‐
nets, the technical descriptions provide decay characteristics for the magnet in
case of a QUENCH or an emergency field shutdown to enable the USER to imple‐
ment adequate life support and other safety procedures. These characteristics indi‐
cate the time beginning with activating the EMERGENCY FIELD SHUTDOWN UNIT
to the moment the field strength in the magnet isocenter has dropped to 20 mT
(typical value: 20s).
The Alarm Box, when installed, provides an indication of the operating conditions of the
MRI system, along with some basic level of control, i.e “SystemON/OFF”.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 59 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
60 2 Room planning

Clear access and visibility are required when positioning the alarm box. The emergency
STOP button is also an integral function of the unit.

[Link] Technical data

Tab. 12 Alarm box

Weight 0.6 kg
Size 230 mm diameter
Depth 100 mm
Limit value for magnetic flux density for 5.0 mT
operating safety

[Link] Dimensions

Fig. 34: OR60 - dimensions of Alarm box

(1) Distance between screws

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 60 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 61

Fig. 35: OR60 Alarm box - LEDs and buttons

1
2

7 6

3 5

8
4

(1) LED FAULT= red

(2) LED POWER = green
(3) Button- SYSTEM ON (LED = green)
(4) Button - SYSTEM OFF
(5) Button - ACKNOWLEDGE
(6) Button - STOP (ERDU)
(7) Tamper proof seal
(8) Power switch locking key

2.4.6 Magnet Stop button

[Link] Function
The function of the remote magnet stop button is to switch off the magnetic field in case
of emergency or hazardous conditions to persons. Operation of the red emergency stop
button while connected to the supervisory unit will cause the Emergency Rundown Unit
to apply power to the switch and quench heaters. The fringe field may affect the func‐
tions of devices operated in the vicinity of the magnet.
The standard delivery of the system consists of three magnet stop buttons:

1. One button is part of the alarm box.

2. One remote magnet stop button is installed inside the examination room.
3. One remote magnet stop button is installed inside the equipment room.

[Link] Technical data

Weight 0.2 kg
Height 80 mm

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 61 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
62 2 Room planning

Width 80 mm
Length 120 mm

[Link] Dimensions

Fig. 36: Remote magnet stop button

(1) Remote magnet stop button

(2) EPO (emergency power off)

2.4.7 ICS-passive (standard configuration)

[Link] Function

 The ICS-passive cabinet has to be installed next to the ECA cabinet. However, be sure to
allow for the hose/cable lengths between the ICS-passive and ECA cabinet.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 62 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 63

For MAGNETOM ESSENZA installations with passive cooling the Stepping Transformer
 (PN: 56 72 378) has to be ordered and installed for all nominal voltage/frequency combi‐
nations other than 400V/50Hz and 480V/60Hz!

[Link] Technical data

Tab. 13 ICS-passive

Weight 280 kg
Height 1920.8 mm
Width 819 mm
Depth 653 mm
Heat dissipation to air n.a.
Limit value for magnetic flux density 5.0 mT

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 63 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
64 2 Room planning

[Link] Dimensions

Fig. 37: ICS-passive

2.4.8 ICS-active (optional configuration)

[Link] Function

 The ICS-active is an optional configuration and only available with the external fan unit.

 For MAGNETOM ESSENZA installations with active cooling a 40 kVA autotransformer

should be supplied locally!

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 64 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 65

[Link] Technical data

Tab. 14 ICS-active

Weight 435 kg
Height 1920.8 mm
Width 1018.7 mm
Depth 653 mm
Heat dissipation to air n.a.
Limit value for magnetic flux density 5.0 mT

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 65 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
66 2 Room planning

[Link] Dimensions

Fig. 38: ICS-active

 The ICS-active cabinet has to be installed next to the ECA cabinet. However, be sure to
allow for the hose/cable lengths between the ICS-active and ECA cabinet.

External fan unit

 The external fan unit is only available with ICS-active (option).

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 66 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 67

Technical Data

Tab. 15 External fan unit

Weight 180 kg
Height 1273 mm
Width 1290 mm
Depth 1422 mm
typical: 15kW
Heat dissipation to air
maximum: 30kW
Noise emmision 54 dB(A) at 10 m
Air flow rate 9880 m³/h
Water flow rate 4000 l/h
Minimum allowable ambient temperature - 25 C
Maximum allowable ambient temperature + 48 C
Limit value for magnetic flux density n.a.
Installation hight above ECA maximum 15 m

 A switch for switsching off the EFU is integrated.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 67 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
68 2 Room planning

Dimensions
Fig. 39: External Fan Unit (EFU)

1422

247 563

M45X2

137
4-n14

50 1029`5
100
1129`5 46

1170
137`5
1273

990

609`5
542

230`5 357`5

403` 5

25 1240`5
60
1290`5

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 68 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 69

Fig. 40: Installation of EFU

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 69 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
70 2 Room planning

Fig. 41: Installation of EFU

 There has to be a service distance of minimum 100cm in each direction around the EFU!

Tab. 16 Bending Radius

Name 2NK6 770 (active) 2NK6 771 (passive)

[mm] [mm]
primary circuit > 300 > 220
RFPA > 130
He-compressor > 120
GC / Filter Panel > 180

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 70 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 71

2.5 Magnetic field

2.5.1 General information

[Link] Magnet site requirements

 The siting of the magnet must be such that during operation neither external influ‐
ences affect the homogeneity of the magnetic field nor the safety of persons
and/or the functioning of sensitive equipment can be affected by the stray mag‐
netic field.
 The final location selected for the magnet has to ensure that the stability and ho‐
mogeneity of the magnetic field are not adversely affected by extraneous fields. In
addition, the magnetic fringe field should not impair the safety of personnel or the
functions of other devices in the vicinity of the magnet.

At present, a site survey measurement has to be performed.

 Contact the ES PM PS department in Erlangen (Mr. Michael Schmitz) to arrange this

measurement.
This will be valid until further notice.

[Link] Magnetic field effects

 If the magnetic flux density in a given area exceeds 0.5 mT, it is necessary to dis‐
play warning signs and restrict access in accordance with local regulations.
The fringe field may affect the functions of devices operated in the vicinity of the magnet.
To prevent interference, the magnetic flux density at the location of these devices may
not exceed certain values. The flux density acceptable for these devices depends on a
number of different parameters. All pertinent information is available through the manu‐
facturer.

The fringe field of the MR system may make its location critical as specified in the plan‐
 ning documentation. Additional room shielding can be calculated and recommended by
the ES PM PS planning department in Erlangen.

Flux density Bmax

Reference values for acceptable magnetic flux densities Bmax

distance 2
Bmax in radial direc‐ axial direc‐ Note
[mT] 1 tion (X/Y) in tion (Z) in
[m] [m]
20 1.4 1.9 Servo ventilator by Siemens

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 71 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
72 2 Room planning

distance 2
Bmax in radial direc‐ axial direc‐ Note
[mT] 1 tion (X/Y) in tion (Z) in
[m] [m]
10 1.5 2.1 RF filter plate
5 1.7 2.4 MR electronics cabinet
3 1.8 2.7 Small motors, watches, cameras, magnetic
data carriers
1 2.2 3.4 Processors, magnetic disk drives, oscillo‐
scopes
0.5 2.5 4.0 Pacemakers, B/W monitors, X-ray tubes, mag‐
netic data carriers, insulin pumps
0.3 2.8 4.4 Color monitor with active and passive shield‐
ing
0.2 3.0 4.9 CT systems by Siemens
0.15 3.1 5.2 Computer monitors (PC)
0.1 3.4 5.8 Linear accelerators by Siemens
0.05 4.1 6.9 X-ray image intensifiers, gamma cameras, lin‐
ear accelerators from other manufacturers

1. 1mT = 10 Gauss
2. The distance is measured from the magnet isocenter

 The magnetic stray field is present in all three dimensions around the magnet and
can be reduced by magnetic shielding. Typical lines of constant magnetic flux den‐
sity are shown in the drawing. This represents the ideal field distribution in air
which can be distorted by the presence of steel in the building.

[Link] Minimum distance between Siemens magnets

It is not possible to install electronics components ECA/ICS/GPA/ACC/SEP of MR systems

with the same operating frequency side by side!
Refer to: ( Co-Siting / Page 84)

 The ECA/ICS/GPA/ACC/SEP cabinets have to be separated by 5.0 m. The magnetic field of

one system has to be ramped to the upper frequency limit of tolerance, the other mag‐
net field to the lower frequency limit of tolerance!
Shimming is only optimized with both magnets ramped up during the shimming proce‐
dure.

 The following minimum distances between magnets are valid if:

n Both magnets are at field.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 72 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 73

n Neither magnet is ramping, while the other is running applications.

n If one magnet is switched off, the other magnet has to be re-shimmed.
n Contact the ES PM PS department if you have non-Siemens products or older system
types, or if you have to plan, e.g., two systems with the same operating frequency
close to each other.

MAGNETOM ESSENZA Distance to the mag‐

min. distance to system type: net isocenter in [m]

1.5T Avanto 5.0

1.0T Harmony 5.0
1.5T Symphony 5.0
1.5T Espree 5.0
1.5T Sonata 5.0
3.0T Allegra 7.0
3.0T Trio 7.0
1.0T Rhapsody 9.0
0.2T Concerto 6.0
0.2T Jazz 7.0
0.35T “C” 6.0

Shimming is only optimized with both magnets ramped up! Neither magnet is ramping,
 while the other is running applications. If one magnet is switched off, the other magnet
has to be re-shimmed.

2.5.2 Interferences
Effects on the magnetic field are divided into:
n Stray field: All devices and systems with functions that can be influenced by an exter‐
nal magnetic field must be taken into consideration. The maximum permissible mag‐
netic flux density depends on the sensitivity of each system component and must be
cross-checked with the equipment manufacturer, if necessary.
n static interference caused by, e.g., ferromagnetic objects, especially those located
underneath the magnet. (e.g., iron girders, reinforcements, especially beneath the
magnet. Partially correctable by shimming the magnet and/or compliance with mini‐
mum clearances/maximum weights)
n dynamic interference caused by, e.g., moving ferromagnetic objects or low frequen‐
cy magnetic fields (e.g., moving ferromagnetic objects, electrical wiring, transformers.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 73 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
74 2 Room planning

Avoidable if minimum distances are kept. Minimum distances depend on moving di‐
rection and magnet orientation. If distances are not kept, please contact ES PM PS).
 In critical cases, either Siemens or a third party authorized by Siemens checks
the suitability of the site. The tests are designed to detect electromagnetic and
mechanical sources of interference.
 Siemens is not responsible for inspecting structural prerequisites, for example,
the load capacity of floors or the heating and air conditioning system of the
site. Similarly, Siemens is not responsible for executing or monitoring prelimi‐
nary on-site installation steps. For these reasons, Siemens will not be held lia‐
ble for the customer’s failure to maintain specific operating conditions.


Static effects can be compensated for by shimming.
Dynamic effects are compensated for by maintaining the maximum values indicated.

 A magnetic shielding is required, e.g., if minimum distances to static / moving iron mass‐
es or AC/DC sources cannot be kept.

[Link] Site inspection

 At present the site must be inspected at the customer's expense by SIEMENS or by

one of SIEMENS' appointed representatives to ensure basic suitability of the site.
This inspection focuses exclusively at the measurement of the magnetic and radio
frequency interference and building vibrations. The inspection of other construc‐
tion requirements, in particular the statics and air conditioning and also the per‐
formance and supervision of on-site installation preparations and the later compli‐
ance with the basic operating requirements, is not Siemens Medical Solutions re‐
sponsibility.

[Link] Dynamic interference

Dynamic in‐ min. distance1 in [m] Notes

terference
radial direc‐ axial direc‐
tion (X/Y) tion (Z)
Iron object With additional iron shielding, it is possible
4.9 5.8 to reduce these distances by about 1 m!
< 50 kg
For objects that appear under an angle of 45
Iron object to 0 from the Z-axis, the axial values must be
5.3 6.5
< 200 kg applied.

Iron object The distances are measured from the mag‐

5.5 7.5 net isocenter to the edge of the object!
< 900 kg
Iron object
6.2 9.0
< 4,500 kg

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 74 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 75

Dynamic in‐ min. distance1 in [m] Notes

terference
Wheelchair / With additional iron shielding, it is possible
4.9 5.8
Bed to reduce these distances by about 1 m!
Car 5.5 7.5 For objects that appear under an angle of 45
to 0 from the Z-axis, the axial values must be
Truck 6.2 9.0 applied.
Train 40.0 40.0 The distances are measured from the mag‐
net isocenter to the edge of the object!
Subway /
40.0 40.0
Tram

1. Distance from the magnet isocenter

[Link] AC interference

AC interference min. distance1 in [m] Notes

radial di‐ axial di‐
rection rection
(X/Y) (Z)
AC Transformer
12.0 8.0
< 100 kVA
AC Transformer
12.5 10.0
< 250 kVA The distances are measured from the mag‐
AC Transformer net isocenter to the edge of the object!
13.0 12.0
< 650 kVA
AC Transformer
14.0 15.0
< 1,600 kVA

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 75 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
76 2 Room planning

AC interference min. distance1 in [m] Notes

radial di‐ axial di‐
rection rection
(X/Y) (Z)
AC Cables
2.0 2.0
< 10 A
AC Cables
2.0 2.0
< 25 A
AC Cables
2.0 2.0
<5A The distances are measured from the mag‐
AC Cables net isocenter to the edge of the object!
3.0 2.0
< 100 A
AC Cables
7.0 3.0
< 250 A
AC Cables
12.0 5.0
< 1000 A

1. Distance from the magnet isocenter

[Link] Static interference

Static interfer‐ min. distance1 in [m] Notes

ences
radial direction axial direction
(X/Y) (Z)
Water cooling valid for MAGNETOM ESSENZA
4.0 4.0
unit

1. Distance from the magnet isocenter

For statical iron (reinforcements) observe the following limitations:

Iron mass Max. allowed iron mass 1.25 m dis‐

tance from magnet isocenter
allowable reinforcement steel in the floor </= 100 kg / m2
allowable iron beam mass in the floor </= 100 kg / m

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 76 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 77

Iron mass e.g. existing additional iron iron mass at 1.2 5m distance from
shielding underneath the magnet magnet isocenter 1.
Contact Mr. Bernhard Heinrich ES PM PS; E-mail: [Link]@[Link] 2

1. Contact ES PM PS in any case and inform them about the circumstances.

2. This address is valid until further notice

According to our recent experience, the mass of the floor plate should be about 600
 kg/m2 (corresponding to a thickness of about min. 20 cm or 8") to achieve good vibra‐
tion and structure-borne sound isolation

2.5.3 Fringe field distribution

[Link] Graphic rendition

Fig. 42: Magnetic fringe field in air; XY-direction

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 77 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
78 2 Room planning

Fig. 43: Magnetic fringe field in air; YZ-direction

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 78 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 79

Fig. 44: Magnet fringe field in air; YZ-direction

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 79 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
80 2 Room planning

Fig. 45: Magnetic fringe field in air; XZ-direction

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 80 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 81

[Link] Tabular form

Tab. 17 Fringe field distribution MAGNETOM ESSENZA

Distance from the magnet isocenter in the direction of

Fringe field
the X-axis in [m] the Y-axis in [m] the Z-axis in [m]
40 mT 1.3 1.3 1.6
20 mT 1.4 1.4 1.9
10 mT 1.5 1.5 2.1
5 mT 1.7 1.7 2.4
3 mT 1.8 1.8 2.7
1 mT 2.2 2.2 3.4
0.5 mT 2.50 2.50 4.00
0.3 mT 2.8 2.8 4.4
0.15 mT 3.1 3.1 5.2
0.1 mT 3.4 3.4 5.8
0.05 mT 4.1 4.1 6.9

 The fringe field extends spatially in three dimensions around the magnet isocenter
and can be reduced by additional iron shielding. The typical fringe field lines repre‐
sent the ideal flux density distribution in air which may be distorted by steel rein‐
forcements or other iron masses in buildings.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 81 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
82 2 Room planning

2.6 Magnetic shielding

 Additional iron shielding is required e.g. if the 0.5mT line has to be within the ex‐
amination room walls, dynamic interferences are present, and public areas have to
be protected against the 0.5mT fringe field.
 A magnetic room shielding must be taken in account and calculated by Siemens
Med Erlangen, H CX CRM-VA TP PM 5, if the site is critical concerning the magnet
fringe field or the required minimum distances are not kept.
 For additional iron room shielding calculations (if required), contact the planning
department:

H CX CRM-VA TP PM 5
phone ++49 (0) 9131-84-7624 (Mr. Heinrich) - 7616 (Mr. Guethlein)
Fax ++49 (0) 9131-84-8632
Mr. Juergen Guethlein; [Link]@[Link]
Contact persons
Mr. Bernhard Heinrich; [Link]@[Link]

Iron masses in the environment

E.g. existing/required additional iron For example, iron beams or reinforce‐
shielding underneath the magnet ment iron at 1.25m distance from the
magnet iso center
Contact Mr. Bernhard Heinrich H CX CRM-VA TP PM 5; E-mail: [Link]@sie‐
[Link] 1

1. This address is valid until further notice

If an additional iron shielding has to be installed and is calculated by H CX CRM-VA TP PM

5, follow the information on the shielding calculation report!
Pay attention to the note on the shielding calculation report whether the magnet has to
be positioned on the Sylomer/Sylodamp kit configuration or the Stop-Choc can be used.
Select the kit accordingly!
If additional iron/iron shielding is located below the magnet the Sylomer/Sylodamp pad

 configuration has to be ordered and used!

Select the kit accordingly!
Pay attention to possibly required additional noise damping measures!
Existing iron masses will affect the magnetic field, the mechanical positioning of the
magnet and therefore the image quality of the system.
If an additional iron room shielding has to be installed, inform the responsible structural
engineer regarding the additional weight load of the iron for the examination room.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 82 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 83

Tab. 18 Stop-Choc / Sylomer

Stop-Choc / Sylomer
Part Number
STOP-CHOC kit 101 64 880
Select
Sylomer kit 104 99 984

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 83 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
84 2 Room planning

2.7 Co-Siting

2.7.1 General information

 Co-Siting describes the prerequisites for planning/installing two MR systems side-
by-side at the same time and with the same operating frequency (field strength).
One other scenario could be:
A customer already has a 1.5T system in operation and is getting a second 1.5T
system to be located in close vicinity of the first one. In this case, the new system
has to meet all requirements specified in this section. The already installed system
should be modified where possible.

It is not possible to install electronic components (ECA/ICS/GPA/ACC/SEP) for systems lo‐

cated side-by-side and working at the same operating frequency. Additional prerequi‐
sites are mandatory!

 The ECA/ACC cabinets have to be separated by 5.0 m (center to center). The magnetic
field of one system has to be ramped, according to the ramping procedure, to the upper
frequency limit of tolerance, the other magnet to the lower frequency limit of tolerance!
Shimming is only optimized with both magnets ramped up during the shimming proce‐
dure.

2.7.2 Prerequisites

 The following prerequisites for Co-Siting are mandatory for both MR systems.

If two systems with the same operating frequency have to be planned (or one is already
installed), take the following into account:
n The attenuation of the RF room must be >100 dB at the required operating frequency.
n For additional/optional wave guides, the following calculation applies:
Lmin = 4 x di
Lmin = wave guide length; di = inner tube diameter (di = < 300mm)
n The two RF rooms cannot be connected electrically.
n The openings of the RF rooms (e.g., door, window, wave guide) have to be turned
away from each other. Avoid having the openings (e.g., door, window, wave guide)
facing each other.
n The ACC cabinet must be installed at a min. distance of 5.0 m from each other.
n The cable ducts (ACC side) of the two systems have to be installed separated by 5 m.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 84 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 85

n The short cable set (1.5 m) is not permitted (this applies only for system types which
are not Tim technology) for use with systems in Co-Siting even if the ACC cabinet is
installed directly underneath the RF filter plate.

This applies only for system types which are Not Tim technology!

 For a system such as MAGNETOM ESSENZA, Avanto, Espree, SaTS, TaTS installed in the
close vicinity to a system with the same operating frequency, the 1.5m cable set can be
used with Tim systems.

n There must be a separate on-site power distribution panels for each system have
to be installed as far away as possible from each other installed for each system.
n The RF filter plates have to be positioned as far away as possible from each other
The minium distance is 5.0 m.
n The connection of the RF filters (gradient and power) has to be performed as reques‐
ted in the installation manual (e.g., torque).
n According to the ramp procedure, one of the MR systems has to be ramped to the
upper frequency limit of, e.g., 63.7 MHz (1.5T), the other MR system has to be ram‐
ped to approx. 100 kHz lower than the first one.

[Link] Magnet distances

Min. distance between magnets 1 in [m]

1.0T 1.5T 0.2T 2 3.0T
0.2T 5.0 6.0 10.0 10.0
0.35T 5.0 6.0 10.0 10.0
1.0T 4.5 5.0 5.0 7.0
1.5T 5.0 5.0 6.0 7.0
3.0T 7.0 7.0 10.0 10.0

1. Contact ES PM PS for details, if the on-site situation requires, e.g., additional iron shielding
2. With EFI unit, no ramping during measurement; additional iron shielding can reduce distance

[Link] Field decay

 The magnet marked "magnet 2" in the example has to be re-ramped first, because
the normal magnetic field decay causes the lower operating frequency tolerance
limit to be reached earlier.

 The special ramping procedure could require a different re-ramping time interval (to the
operating frequency after the normal field decay) of the two systems!

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 85 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
86 2 Room planning

Fig. 46: Magnetic field decay

[Link] Component distances

 The distance from the isocenter of the electronics cabinet to each other must be min.
5.0m.

Fig. 47: ACC installation with two systems at the same operating frequency

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 86 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 87

[Link] Magnet orientation

Two magnets with the same operating frequency positioned in "Z" direction should be
 avoided due to the required distances and increased RF coupling between the systems!
Contact ES PM PS in this case.

Fig. 48: 2 magnets line up in “Z” axis

 It is permitted to position two magnets with the same operating frequency in the "X" di‐
rection.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 87 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
88 2 Room planning

Fig. 49: Magnet parallel installation

 It is permitted to position two magnets with the same operating frequency at an angle
to each other.

Fig. 50: 2 magnets 90˚ to each other

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 88 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 89

2.8 Building vibration specifications

Vibrations at the site have the ability to affect the stability and homogeneity of the mag‐

 netic field. As a result, external vibrations or shocks affecting the magnet may degrade
image quality. In the three spatial orientations, the building must not exceed the follow‐
ing vibrational specifications.

2.8.1 General information

 The mass of the floor plate should be about 600 kg/m2 (corresponding to a thickness of
about min. 20cm or 8") to achieve a good vibration and structure-borne sound isolation.

The fringe field of the MR system may make its location critical as specified in the plan‐


ning documentation. Additional room shielding can be calculated and recommended by
the ES PM PS planning department in Erlangen.
See also: ( Magnetic shielding / Page 82)

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 89 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
90 2 Room planning

2.8.2 Vibration specification diagram

Fig. 51: Permissible acceleration

frequency [Hz] acceleration [m/s2 rms]

Vibration isolators Sylomer
1.0 0.0040 0.0040
2.0 0.0020 0.0022
3.0 0.0013 0.0015
4.0 0.0013 0.0011

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 90 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 91

frequency [Hz] acceleration [m/s2 rms]

Vibration isolators Sylomer
5.0 0.0013 0.0008
6.0 0.0013 0.0007
7.0 0.0013 0.0006
8.0 0.0013 0.0006
9.0 0.0018 0.0006
10.0 0.0024 0.0006
11.0 0.0031 0.0006
12.0 0.0040 0.0006
13.0 0.0050 0.0008
14.0 0.0061 0.0011
15.0 0.0075 0.0015
16.0 0.0090 0.0021
17.0 0.0106 0.0027
18.0 0.0125 0.0035
19.0 0.0146 0.0044
20.0 0.0168 0.0056
21.0 0.0193 0.0056
22.0 0.0220 0.0056
23.0 0.0250 0.0056
24.0 0.0282 0.0056
25.0 0.0316 0.0056
26.0 0.0316 0.0056
27.0 0.0316 0.0056
28.0 0.0316 0.0056
29.0 0.0316 0.0056
30.0 0.0316 0.0056
35.0 0.0316 0.0056
40.0 0.0316 0.0056
50.0 0.0316 0.0056

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 91 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
92 2 Room planning

frequency [Hz] acceleration [m/s2 rms]

Vibration isolators Sylomer
60.0 0.0316 0.0056
70.0 0.0316 0.0056
80.0 0.0316 0.0056
90.0 0.0316 0.0056
100.0 0.0316 0.0056

Tab. 19 Building vibration specifications

of the acceleration of grav‐

The acceleration of is ity
1/10000
0.001 m/s2 g=9.81 m/s2
or -80 dB(g)

 The requirement for accelerating amax is measured as maximum rms value per fre‐
quency component < 0.5 Hz in the Fourier Transformation of the recorded signal
(spectrum).
 The vibration level of continuous vibrations (caused by air condition generator,
compressor, etc.) at the location of the magnet must not exceed the specified val‐
ues. For all non-continuous transient vibrations, the figures should be multiplied
by 4 (or 12 dB).
 The acceleration of 0.001 m/s² is about 1/10000 (or about -80 dB) of the accelera‐
tion of gravity (g=9.81 m/s2).

Tab. 20 Stop-Choc / Sylomer

Stop-Choc / Sylomer
Part Number
STOP-CHOC kit 101 64 880
Select
Sylomer kit 104 99 984

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 92 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 93

2.8.3 Decision matrix

Fig. 52: Sites measurement - decision matrix

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 93 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
94 2 Room planning

2.9 Noise emission

2.9.1 General information

The MAGNETOM ESSENZA is equipped with a set of Stop-Choc spring kits for reducing


the structurally-borne noise.
In addition, the covers are equipped with passive noise cancellation for reducing air‐
borne noise.

 The warning sign “Ear protection” has to be posted on all examination room entrance
doors.

Fig. 53: Hearing protection sign

Due to the physical characteristics of the MR system, the system generates a certain
amount of noise, emitted as contact or acoustic noise.
The table below provides you with the information to install the noise attenuation as re‐
quired, e.g., by law. The attenuation usually incurs additional structural expenditures.
The noise level for the various systems averaged across different sequences is shown in
the table below.

[Link] Regulations

Local regulations (e.g. VGB 121)

 Refer to local regulations for noise protection.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 94 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 95

Allowable noise level for operating personnel1 Room Level

Limiting value related to 20 Pa acoustic pressure </= 55dB(A)
A-weighted average value across 8 hours Operating room </= 55dB(A)
A-weighted average value across a sequence </= 65dB(A)

1. The noise level is valid for the operating personnel working in the operating room based on VGB 121.

Allowable noise level for neighbors Level

Limiting value related to 20 Pa acoustic pressure </= 20/30dB(A)
e.g., sick room, bedroom
A-weighted average value across 8 hours </= 20dB(A)
A-weighted average value across a sequence </= 30dB(A)
e.g., external office
A-weighted average value across 8 hours </= 30dB(A)
A-weighted average value across a sequence </= 40dB(A)

[Link] Noise cancellation

 If required, noise reduction should be realized based on the noise emission values,
as specified.

If you expect noise problems, the RF room manufacturer you are using may be able to
 deliver noise reduction components with the RF room (e.g., interior; RF window; RF
door, etc.).

2.9.2 Noise emission values

Tab. 21 Noise value

Examination room Equipment room Control room1

Acoustic noise emission
~65 dB(A) </= 55 dB(A)
~ 75 dB(A) 2
(average value) (average value)

1. All components installed in the operators room must achieve </= 55dB(A) noise emission.
2. Average value across 8 hours.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 95 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
96 2 Room planning

Fig. 54: Noise Spectrum

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 96 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Room planning 2 97

2.10 Static requirements

2.10.1 Area requirements and floor loading

The weight of the RF-cabin depends on the cabin size and the kind of RF-cabin used (e.g.
modular, copper, etc.). The weight of magnetic shielding (if required) depends on the
material used and on the shielding requirements. The system has to be installed on a sol‐
id underground with sufficient carrying capacity, such as, e.g. concrete. The load bearing
capacity has to be checked by a stress analyst.
You have to consider the additional weights of the RF-cabin and possibly iron shielding
for static calculations.
Fig. 55: Footprint - seismic brackets (template)

Magnet floor loading

Total magnet weight 4350 kg
Stop-Choc springs (standard configura‐ 4 support feet each 150 mm X 250 mm
tion) (375 cm²)

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 97 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
98 2 Room planning

Total floor loading ~ 45.0 kN

Foot at position 1 9.4 kN
Foot at position 2 9.4 kN
Foot at position 3 13.0 kN
Foot at position 4 13.0 kN

 The floor in the vicinity of the magnet (2.2 m x 4.5 m) must be leveled within max.
+/-2.0 mm.

2.10.2 Center of gravity

n.a.

2.10.3 Earthquake prevention

[Link] Magnet seismic anchoring

 The seismic anchoring is valid for the Stop-Chock spring configuration.


The seismic brackets are permanently mounted to the magnet box sections.
Seismic anchoring is related to local/national regulations, guidelines or codes.

[Link] Electronic cabinet - seismic anchorning

If you need seismic anchoring for your site, you have to order the "Seismic Kit" for the

 cabinets separately under part number 57 63 367!

Seismic anchoring is related to local/national regulations, guidelines or codes.

[Link] Helium compressor - seismic anchoring

 The seismic fixation of the helium compressor can be fitted to the housing.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 98 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 99

3.1 General Information

3.1.1 Installation and service tools

 Only Siemens Medical Solutions equipment or equipment recommended by Siemens

Medical Solutions may be used.

Enclose find the INTRANET Link to the Common MR Service_Tool_List:

 ( Service_Tool_List, [Link]
startfolder=961cdcb4da5da085a64d90de6b69c052)

3.1.2 Medical Accessories and Supplies for Siemens Modalities

Enclose find the INTRANET Link to the “med & more Main Catalog”; MR-Specific Accesso‐


ries:
( med & more Main Catalog, [Link]
%5FE%5F1/catAS_TECHNICAL_EQUIPMENT_FOR_MRN2232E.html)

3.1.3 Cooperation Partner/Supplier List

[Link] Accoustic Engineer recommendation

Tab. 22 AcousticEngineer

Acoustic Engineer contact:

ifb Wolfgang Sorge
Name
Bureau for building physics
Street Südwestpark 100
City 90449 Nürnberg
Country Germany
Phone +49 (0) 911 / 67047 - 0
E-mail bauphysik@[Link]
URL [Link]

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 99 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
100 3 Preparation for installation

[Link] Glen Dimplex Representations

Tab. 23 Glen Dimplex Deutschland GmbH

Glen Dimplex Deutschland / RIEDEL Cooling Technology con‐

tact:
Glen Dimplex Deutschland GmbH
Name
RIEDEL Cooling Technology
Street Am Goldenen Feld 18
City 95326 Kulmbach
Country Germany
Phone +49 (0) 9221 / 709 – 545
Fax +49 (0) 9221 / 709 – 519
E-mail medical@[Link]
URL [Link]

[Link] RF room manufacturer list

RF room manufacturers
Albatross Projects GmbH Albatross Projects (Shanghai) Ltd.
Daimlerstrasse 17 Number 2998 Longwu Road
89564 Nattheim / Germany Xuhui District
phone: +49 (0) 7321 / 730-543 200231 Shanghai, China
Fax.: +49 (0) 7321 / 730-590 phone: +86 139 16 21 93 53
e-mail: info-med@[Link]
ETS Lindgren-Rayproof Ltd. ETS Lindgren RF Enclosures, Inc.
(Europe) (Rest of World)
Boulten Road 400 High Grove Blvd.
Pin Green Industrial Area Glendale Heights
Stevenage, Hertfordshire IL 60139 U.S.A.
SG1 4th England phone: 001 630-307-7200
phone: +44 1438-730-700 Fax: 001 630-307-7571
Fax: +44 1438-730-750 e-mail: info@[Link]
Internet: [Link] Internet: [Link]

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 100 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 101

RF room manufacturers
ETS Lindgren HAMACO GmbH
B 507A Technology Fortune Center Elektro Magnetische Komponenten
Number 8 Xue Qing Road Rombrocker Strasse 15
Haidian District D-58640 Iserlohn
Beijing Postcode: 100083, China phone: +49 (0) 2371 9761-5
phone + (8610) 82730877, 82730878 Fax: +49 (0) 2371 9761-60
Fax + (8610) 82730880 e-mail: info@[Link]
e-mail china@[Link] Internet: [Link]
IMEDCO AG (Headquarter) IMEDCO Technology (Shenzhen) Co. Ltd.
Medical RF and Magnetic Shielding Spe‐ Medical RF and Magnetic Shielding Specialist
cialist for Europe, the middle East, CIS for China and Asia
and Africa Number 2 Building Hongye Industrial Park
Industriestrasse West 14 Lezhujiao Baoan
4614 Hägendorf, Switzerland 518102 Shenzhen, China
phone: +41 62 209 40 20 Phone: +86 (755) 297 85 959
Fax: +41 62 209 40 29 Fax: +86 (755) 297 85 169
e-mail: imedco@[Link] e-mail: [Link]@[Link]
Internet: [Link] Internet: [Link]
IMEDCO America Ltd. (USA) SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Medical RF and Magnetic Shielding Spe‐ Abschirmtechnik
cialist for North and South America Löhestrasse 49
15223 Herriman Blvd, Suite 4 D-53773 Hennef
Noblesville, Indiana 46060, USA phone: +49 (0) 2242 96978-0
phone: +1 (317) 773 85 00 Fax: +49 (0) 2242 96978-79
Fax: +1 (317) 773 85 08 e-mail: schwarz@[Link]
e-mail: [Link]@[Link]
Internet: [Link]
MR-Schutztechnik
Kabinenbaugesellschaft mbH
Dammweg 13
D-64807 Dieburg
phone: +49 (0) 6071 985710
Fax: +49 (0) 6071 985711
e-mail: MR-Schutztechnik@[Link]
Internet: [Link]

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 101 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
102 3 Preparation for installation

[Link] Quench Tube Compensator supply

Quench tube support

Witzenmann GmbH
Kevin East
Sales Manager
Witzenmann UK Limited
mobile: +44 (079006) 05594
Tel: +44 (0)1924 89 44 55
Fax: +44 (0)1924 89 39
e-mail: 45kevineastwuk@[Link]

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 102 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 103

3.2 Component installation

3.2.1 Magnet

[Link] Positioning the Magnet

Position the magnet exactly over the markings on the floor. Follow the Planning Guide
or consult the project manager. It is particularly important that you maintain the correct

 distances from the walls.

Measure the distance from the magnet to the wall using the patient table. Measure the
patient table when it is fully extended and fully inside the magnet.

n Position the magnet over the markings on the floor. Do not lower it to the floor, how‐
ever.
Fig. 56: Footprint - seismic brackets (top view)

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 103 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
104 3 Preparation for installation

 WARNING
Working underneath a suspended load is prohibited.
 Otherwise, you risk injuring yourself

 WARNING
Do not lower the magnet to the floor until the STOP-CHOCs (option: Sylomer
plates) are in place.
 Otherwise, you risk injuring yourself and damaging the magnet covers and
magnet.

The quench pipe must not be installed on the magnet (it may have to be removed) when
 the magnet is lifted. It may be necessary to loosen the cables, otherwise the system can
be damaged.

Configuration with Stop-Chocs

Sylomer plates delivered with the system

Sylomer T (turquoise) 8 pieces, 50 x 250 x 6 mm STOP-CHOCs
Sylomer HD 300 (green) 4 pieces, 150 x 250 x 6 mm STOP-CHOCs

 Do not remove the lifting elements from the box section before placing the parts under
the magnet feet as shown in the following figure.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 104 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 105

Fig. 57: STOP-CHOC (side view)

Position the aluminum plates so that they lie flush with the external edges of the alumi‐

 num blocks.
Otherwise, you will experience problems when installing the covers.

Fig. 58: STOP-CHOC (front view) Placing the parts under the four magnet
feet, refer to the markings on the floor:
n STOP-CHOC (1)
Already installed at the factory.
n Sylomer T, Sylomer HD 300 (2)
1 n Position the aluminum plates and
GRP plate (3) (approx. 10 mm thick)
under the Sylomer.
The GRP plate on the floor and
2 above the aluminum plates.

(1) STOP-CHOC
(2) Sylomer T, Sylomer HD 300
(3) Aluminum plates and GRP-plate

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 105 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
106 3 Preparation for installation

Configuration with Sylomer plates (optional)

Sylomer plates delivered with the system

Sylomer SR850 (blue) 4 pieces, 125 x 125x 50 mm
Sylomer HD300 (green) 4 pieces, 125 x 125x 50 mm

 Do not remove the lifting elements from the box section before placing the parts under
the magnet feet as shown in the following figure.

Fig. 59: Removing the transportation block from the n Remove the screws (1).
foot
n Remove the transportation block (3)
2 from the foot(2).
1

(1) Screws
(2) Foot
(3) Transportation block

Fig. 60: Installing the Sylomer bracket Install the Sylomer bracket under the
four corners of the base bracket.
n Mount the profile (3) in the base
1 2
bracket (2).
n Install the screws, washer, and
3 nuts(1).
n To lay the Sylomer plates under‐
neath (4,5) .

4 5 n Sylomer HD300 is green.

n Sylomer SR850 is blue.

(1) Screws, washers, and nuts

(2) Base bracket
(3) Sylomer bracket
(4) Sylomer HD300
(5) Sylomer SR850

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 106 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 107

Fig. 61: Sylomer bracket (front view) When placing the parts under the four
magnet feet, refer to the markings on
1 the floor:
n Bracket (1).
Already mounted.
n Position Sylomer HD 300 (2) and
Sylomer SR850 (3) under the brack‐
et (1).
2 3 n Position the aluminum plates and
GRP plate (approx. 15 mm thick) un‐
der the Sylomer.

(1) Sylomer bracket

The GRP plate on the floor and
(2) Sylomer HD 300 (green) above the aluminum plates.
(3) Sylomer SR850 (blue)

Fig. 62: Sylomer bracket (side view)

Position the aluminum plates so that they lie flush with the internal edge of the Sylomer

 plates.
Otherwise, you will experience problems when installing the covers.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 107 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
108 3 Preparation for installation

[Link] Installing the Covers

Installing the PTAB cover

 Before installing magnet covers, the PTAB cover has to be installed first.

For PTAB without vertical drive

n Check the cover assembly
Fig. 63: PTAB cover assembly

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 108 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 109

n Install the PTAB cover bracket (two sides)

Fig. 64: Cover bracket installation

(1) Bracket
(2) Securing position

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 109 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
110 3 Preparation for installation

n Install the PTAB cover

Fig. 65: Cover installation

Fig. 66: Securing screws

For PTAB with vertical drive

The new type front cover for the vertical movement is used now.
The following is the installation for the new type front cover.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 110 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 111

Fig. 67: Fix the front cover on the bracket n Install the new type front cover on
the brackets with the screws on the
both sides.

Fig. 68: Fix the front cover with the screw n Slide up the front cover and fix it
with screws on the both sides.

(1) Screw

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 111 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
112 3 Preparation for installation

Concluding steps

Fig. 69: Adjust the front cover n If the front cover is not moving
smoothly when the patient table
moves up and down, adjsut the
brackets on the both sides according
1 to the arrow direction.

(1) Bracket

Fig. 70: Bracket table to cover assembly. Dot n Find the bracket from the PTAB
packing.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 112 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 113

Fig. 71: Install the bracket table to cover the assembly n Install the bracket table to cover the
Dot (patient end ,left side)
assembly Dot.

(1) Bracket table to cover assembly. Dot

(2) Cover
(3) Patient table

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 113 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
114 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 72: Install the bracket table to cover the assembly n Install the bracket table to cover the
Dot (patient end, right side)
assembly Dot.

(1) Bracket table to cover assembly. Dot

(2) Cover
(3) Patient table

Final checks
n Check that the front cover is moving smoothly.

Overview of covers

 The materials required (screws, washers, etc.) are included in a separate package or as‐
sembled before delivery.

 Two people are required for installing the turret covers.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 114 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 115

Fig. 73: Overview of covers (for installation)

(1) Front funnel

(2) Rear funnel
(3) Turret cover, right
(4) Turret cover, left
(5) Top cover
(6) Turret extension, front
(7) Turret extension, rear
(8) Lower right cover
(9) Lower service cover
(10) Design panel - left standard
(11) Air filter cover

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 115 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
116 3 Preparation for installation

(12) Upper service cover

Fig. 74: Overview front cover

3
1

5
4

(1) Front cover

(2) Control Panel Cover
(3) Design panel - left standard/PMU
(4) Front cover lower left
(5) Front cover lower right

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 116 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 117

Fig. 75: Overview rear cover

1
3

2
6
5

(1) Rear cover

(2) Rear funnel
(3) Cover gradient cables
(4) Cover water hoses
(5) Air filter cover
(6) Air filter

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 117 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
118 3 Preparation for installation

Standard

Fig. 76: Preinstalled covers on system Fig. 77: Preinstalled covers(2)

1
1

(1) Cover on patient side (1) Cover on service side

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 118 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 119
Fig. 78: Cover parts on magnet
© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 119 of 392 MAGNETOM
Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
120 3 Preparation for installation

Installing the covers

Front funnel

Fig. 79: Install front cover funnel center n Install the front cover funnel center.

(1) Front cover funnel center

Fig. 80: Install front cover lower right n Attach the lower right of the front
cover to the front cover

(1) Front cover lower right

(2) Patient table

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 120 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 121

Fig. 81: Install front cover lower left n Attach the lower left of the front
cover to the front cover

(1) Front cover lower left

(2) Patient table

Fig. 82: Install the front funnel, complete. Dot n Install the front funnel, complete. .

(1) Front funnel, complete. Dot

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 121 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
122 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 83: Fixing screws of front cover funnel, complete n Install the screws.

Fig. 84: Install front cover lower n Install the lower front cover suitable
for PTAB vertical or the lower front
cover cut w/o vertical

(1) Front cover funnel, complete

Fig. 85: Fixing screws and caps

(1) Two screws and caps

(2) Three screws and three smaller caps

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 122 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 123

Fig. 86: Gap between PTAB and front lower cover n Make sure the gap between the top
of the PTAB and the “lower front
cover” is 5-8 mm.

(1) Front lower cover

(2) PTAB
(3) Gap between PTAB and front lower cover

Rear funnel
n If the rear cover was removed so that the magnet could be moved, you must reattach
it.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 123 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
124 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 87: Install rear funnel n Install the rear funnel, complete.

(1) Rear funnel

Fig. 88: Back cover funnel compl. side view n Install the air hose and light cable.

(1) Air hose

(2) Light cable

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 124 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 125

Fig. 89: Rear funnel - complete n Install 7 screws.

Turret cover, right

Fig. 90: Turret cover right (patient end) n Install the right turret cover.

(1) Turret cover right

(2) Countersunk screws
Fig. 91: Turret cover right (service end)

(1) Turret cover right

(2) Countersunk screws

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 125 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
126 3 Preparation for installation

Turret cover, left

Fig. 92: Turret cover left n Slide the left turret cover into posi‐
tion so that it meets the right tur‐
1 ret cover
2

(1) Turret cover left

(2) Turret cover right

Fig. 93: Turret cover left n Secure it using the screws.

(1) Countersunk screw

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 126 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 127

Top cover

Fig. 94: Top cover (patient end) n Attach the top cover and secure it
using screws (1).
1
1

(1) Countersunk screw

Fig. 95: Top cover (service end)

1
1

(1) Countersunk screw

Turret extension


The cover surface is very sensitive.
Place the cover on a clean area.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 127 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
128 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 96: Coupling clamp Fig. 97: Support angle

1 2

(1) Part 1
(2) Part 2

Fig. 98: Distance between turret cover and RF-room n Measure the distance between the
ceiling
turret cover and the ceiling of the
RF-room.
n Transfer the measurement minus
1 cm (shadow clearance) to the tur‐
ret extension minus.

Fig. 99: Cut the turret extension with the cutting tool n Cut the turret extension to the cor‐
rect size using the cutting tool provi‐
ded, cutting only on the upper side
of the turret extension (lower side
has a special shape).
Refer to the information inside the
1 rear cover.

(1) Cutting tool

(2) Turret extension

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 128 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 129

Fig. 100: Affix the support angle n Clean the inner surface of the tur‐
ret extension.
n Affix the support angles in the cor‐
ners to the inside. Begin with the
marked side (arrow), refer to the
1 markings of the inner surface.

(1) Support angle

Fig. 101: Affix the support angle

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 129 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
130 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 102: Rear turret extension with affixed support an‐ n Affix the coupling clamps (1, 2), re‐
gels and coupling clamps
fer to the markings on the inner sur‐
face.

2 1 2

(1) Support angles

(2) Coupling clamps, part 1
Fig. 103: Front turret extension with affixed support
angles and coupling clamps

3 3

(1) Support angles

(2) Coupling clamps, part 2
(3) Coupling clamps, part 1

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 130 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 131

Fig. 104: Turret extension n Attach the front turret extension.

(1) Turret extension, front

(2) Turret extension, rear
Fig. 105: Front turret extension, as seen from the serv‐
ice end

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 131 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
132 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 106: Turret extension (patient end)  This results in a clearance of ap‐
proximately 1 cm between the
2 turret extension and the ceiling
of the RF-room.
1

(1) Turret extension (front)

(2) Shadow gap

Lower right cover

Fig. 107: Attached lower right cover n Attach the lower right cover (1) to
the left and right covers.
1

(1) Lower right cover

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 132 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 133

Fig. 108: Install lower right cover screws n Install the seven screws.

Air filter cover

Fig. 109: Connect the air hose n Connect the air hose to the filter
cover.

(1) Air hose

(2) Filter cover

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 133 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
134 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 110: Air filter cover n Attach the filter cover to the rear
cover using three screws.
n Check to ensure that the air filter is
1 attached correctly.

(1) Air filter

(2) Screws

Fig. 111: Air filter cover n Attach the air filter cover by snap‐
ping it into place.

(1) Air filter cover

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 134 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 135

Upper service cover

Fig. 112: Upper service cover n Connect the upper service cover to
the left turret cover.

Fig. 113: Upper service cover n Push down on the upper service cov‐
er to lock the snap locks.
n Secure it using screws (1).

(1) Screws
(2) Position of snap locks

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 135 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
136 3 Preparation for installation

Lower service cover

Fig. 114: Removed lower service cover n Attach the lower service cover (1)
using the bracket (2).

(1) Lower service cover

(2) Bracket

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 136 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 137

Fig. 115: Lower service access cover n Push down on the lower service cov‐
er to lock the snap locks (2).
n Secure it using screws (1).

(1) Screws
(2) Snap lock positions

[Link] Earthquake areas

For systems installed in areas prone to earthquakes, that is, they are mounted to the
floor, the corresponding “Seismic Brackets”are already attached to the [Link] in‐
structions do no include the procedure for mounting the system to the floor.

The seismic brackets are secured to the magnet Stop-Chock.

 Use the earthquake anchors in accordance with local or national laws, regulations,
guidelines, or codes.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 137 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
138 3 Preparation for installation

Overview
Fig. 116: Footprint - seismic brackets (template)

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 138 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 139

Seismic brackets at service end (left, non-turret side)

Fig. 117: Seismic bracket at service end

5
7

4 2

6
3

(1) Foot
(2) Stop-Choc
(3) Seismic bracket
(4) Adjusting plate
(5) M16*30 screw
(6) M16 Nordlock washer
(7) M16 nut

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 139 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
140 3 Preparation for installation

Seismic brackets at service end (right, non-turret side)

Fig. 118: Seismic brackets at service end (right, turret side)

3
2

(1) Foot
(2) Stop-Choc
(3) Seismic bracket
(4) Screw M16x50
(5) M16 Nordlock washer

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 140 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 141

Seismic brackets at patient end

Fig. 119: Seismic bracket at patient end

1
4

2 6

(1) Foot
(2) Stop-Choc
(3) Seismic bracket
(4) M16*50 screw
(5) M16 Nordlock washer
(6) Cover socket (for replacing normal socket on seismic magnet)

[Link] Cryogen supply

General
For satisfactory operation of the MR system, liquid as well as gaseous helium is required.
Based on the physical characteristics and the price of liquid helium, the cryogen has to be
handled according to the special instructions provided in the subsequent pages.
As early as possible in the planning phase, the structural and logistic aspects of gas supply
for the MR system have to be established.
Liquid helium is transported in containers especially designed for this purpose (dewars).

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 141 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
142 3 Preparation for installation

High priority must be given to preparing the site for a trouble-free reading!

 This means ensuring that the system components can be installed and connected as
soon as possible to reduce the amount of liquid helium boil-off during the installation
process.

Every reputable supplier provides liquid helium dewars of non-magnetizable material.

 However, cylinders for gaseous helium are usually made from magnetic material. These
cylinders must remain outside the vicinity of the magnet when it is energized.

Structural requirements
Since the vessel dimensions for liquid and gaseous helium must meet certain specifica‐
tions, the following issues have to be clarified with the supplier prior to delivery:

1. Access routes
2. Width of doors
3. Size of elevators
4. Height of rooms and hallways
5. Temporary and permanent storage area for gas cylinders
6. Load capacity and condition of transport routes

 To move the helium dewars into the MR suite, evaluate the height and width of all ac‐
cess routes and doorways during the planning phase.

Transport methods for helium

Liquid helium is transported from the supplier to the magnet in dewars holding between
100 to 450 liters of liquid helium. The dewars are transported in special trucks equipped
with an elevator platform. Special containers are available for air-freighting liquid helium.

Dimensions of the dewars

After the transport routes have been determined, the dewars and the refill equipment re‐
quired have to be established.
The following items require clarification:

1. Dimension and fill capacity of dewars?

2. Pressurized or non-pressurized dewar?
3. Supplier provides a full set of refill equipment?
4. The syphon attaches to the magnet?
The following suppliers provide a full set of refill equipment:
n Linde AG

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 142 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 143

n Messergriesheim GmbH
n Air Products GmbH

Delivery of magnet

The magnet is shipped cold (standard case).

Magnets that are shipped cold leave the Siemens Magnet Technology factory with
a fill level of approx. 89-100%. This will allow for approx. 20 days from shipping the

 system ex-factory to the next required LHe refill.

To keep helium boil-off to a minimum, the refrigerator (cold head) should be put
into operation as soon as the magnet arrives at the site.

Boil-off rate and helium level for the MAGNETOM ESSENZA magnet
Before the magnet is installed or energized, the helium level is measured with the helium
service level meter.

Helium content

Helium content
Magnet type liters at 100%
MAGNETOM ESSENZA 1400

Boil-off rate
Without the cold head running, the liquid Helium will boil off from ~70% lHe to 0%
lHe in approx. 20 days (~3.5% / day).

Helium loss without cold head running

Shipping loss rate ~ 4.5% / 24h ~ 63l
On site loss rate ~ 3.5% / 24h ~ 49l

n With cold head in operation, approx. 0.0%

n Without cold head approx. 3.5% / day
n 1% lHe level equals approx. 14 liter lHe

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 143 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
144 3 Preparation for installation

Helium boil-off
Magnet type Refill interval (typical) Boil off rate (typical)
1.5T 10 years 1 0.0 l/h 2

1. for typical, undisturbed clinical use, depending on sequences and operating times as well as the service
provided to the system at regular intervals.
2. for typical, undisturbed clinical use, depending on sequences and operating times as well as the service
provided to the system at regular intervals.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 144 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 145

3.3 Cable inlets/Hose inlets

n.a.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 145 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
146 3 Preparation for installation

3.4 Cable conduits

n.a.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 146 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 147

3.5 On-site electrical installation

3.5.1 General information

To minimize interference on line voltage cables for the MAGNETOM, non-MAGNETOM
components (e.g., heating and air conditioning unit, pumps, light sources) should not be
connected after the main power supply line.
The main power supply line must be split up into different sub-line power distribution
panels. The MAGNETOM System has to be connected to a separate sub-line power distri‐
bution panel.
No other components must be connected to the MAGNETOM system sub-power distribu‐
tion panel.
The examination room installation must be completed according to, e.g, DIN VDE
0100-710 for Germany or according to local codes/regulations/guidelines, and if necessa‐
ry, connected to an emergency power supply.
Room lighting should not be affected when the MR system is switched off or shut down
via the Emergency SHUTDOWN button.
To avoid extraneous electrical fields in the examination room, the following must not be
installed or used:
n Telephone connections
n Extensions for in-house intercom systems
n Fluorescent lights
n Energy-saving light bulbs

 The system and the system components are designed to operate safely, and within the
ITIC requirements, during power interferences.

The installation of the line-power supply unit and the connection of the MR system to

 the line-power supply unit has to apply to national guidelines.

The cable for connecting to the local line power to the system has to be provider locally!

[Link] Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMV)

All values with respect to electromagnetic compatibility are based on IEC 60601-1-2:2001
norms.

Emitted interference
Radiated interference Class B
Conducted interference Class B

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 147 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
148 3 Preparation for installation

Interference immunity
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Contact discharge +/- 6 kV
Airborne discharge +/- 8 kV
RF radiation
ISM bands 3 V/m
Quick, transient disturbances (bursts)
AC voltage supply cables +/- 2 kV
Other connecting lines +/- 1 kV
Surges
AC voltage supply cables +/- 2 kV

To minimize interference on line voltage cables for the MAGNETOM, non-MAGNETOM

components (e.g., heating and air conditioning unit, pumps, light sources) should not be
connected after the service line. As a rule, heating and air conditioning units have to be
equipped with line filters.

[Link] Planning prerequisites for Application Group 2 (AG2)

 In general the MR system can be installed in Application Group 2 examination rooms.

The use of the MR system as an application group 2 device requires that the customer be
notified that the MR system can be operated via a safety voltage supply (e.g., UPS). Sys‐
tem-related requirements to be met by the voltage supply are included in the Planning
Guide (PG). The customer can also order the UPS released by GG MR via the price book.
However, these safety voltage supplies are not part of the standard delivery of MR sys‐

 tems. The customer has to be informed that an MR system without UPS buffering cannot
be operated immediately after a short-term power failure. Instead the system will have
to be booted for several minutes.
In addition the operator has to ensure that explosive anesthetic gases (and other explo‐
sive gases) are not used or that explosive gas mixtures are not generated in the exami‐
nation room.

 The following information must be passed on to the customer, if AG2 is required:

n The MR system is a medical device whose safety is tested according to IEC 60601. It
can be part of application group 2, if it is connected to a TN-S voltage supply, and if
the device is protected via a FI switch. It does not matter that the protection against
contact in the MR system is configured as protective grounding of conductible parts
and the power supply is switched off directly in case of overload or short-circuits. This
does not involve the safety concept of other (possible life-supporting) medical devices
that are connected to residual current-operated protective devices (RCDs) and whose
protective grounding is connected to the MR system.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 148 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 149

n The customer has to be informed that the type of configuration of the MR system
does not meet the requirements for medical electrical systems to be used in explo‐
sion-protected rooms. It has to be assumed that during operation, imaging sparks may
be generated anywhere in the examination room (within the Faraday cage). As a re‐
sult, the operator has to ensure that explosive anesthetic gases are not used or that
explosive gas mixtures are not generated in the examination room.
n When the MR system is used during surgical invasion, our risk management has to de‐
scribe how we prevent that the functions of the MR system or the operating table con‐
nected to it are limited by discharged liquids.
n The MR OR table developed by Siemens Medical Solutions can be supplied by the MR
system. A residual current-operated protective device is not required. In case of power
failure or short-circuit outside the immediate vicinity of the OR table, continuous oper‐
ation of the OR table is possible until the patient can be safely rescued. In case, the MR
system is connected to a safety voltage supply, the OR table is operational for the (re‐
maining) period of operation of the MR system, since it is supplied with power. Essen‐
tially, the period of operation is determined by the use of the MR system during the
power failure and the installed accumulator capacity, or the configuration of the back‐
up power supply (e.g. UPS).

3.5.2 On-site power supply

 IT IS THE CUSTOMER‘S RESPONSIBILITY TO COMPLY WITH THE POWER QUALITY REQUIRE‐

MENTS FOR SIEMENS MEDICAL SOLUTIONS EQUIPMENT.

 The electrical feeder to the Siemens Medical Solutions equipment must feed only
the imaging system and be kept separate from electrical feeders to HV-AC, motors,
pumps, compressors, elevators and other potential sources of electrical interfer‐
ence.
 The electrical feeder to the imaging system must be run directly to a main facility
distribution panel or to the facility's service entrance, with no other loads powered
from this feeder.

[Link] On-site power specifications

Nominal value Tolerance1

380, 400, 420, 440, 460, 480 V 3-
Voltage range +10% / -10%
phase and ground
Line to line unbalanced -- max. 2%
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz +/- 1 Hz

1. For all line conditions (e.g., power supply under voltage from the power plant) including maximum volt‐
age drop according to the connection value.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 149 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
150 3 Preparation for installation

The following voltage distortion limits (acc. to the IEEE 519 standard) apply to the power
supplies of Siemens MAGNETOM Systems:

 The total harmonic distortion (THD) for the customer supply voltage may not be higher
than 5%.
Individual harmonic distortion may not be higher than 3%.

 In terms of the allowable voltage and frequency fluctuations, the requirements of EN

60601-1 are valid! If EN 60601-1 does not apply, refer to local regulations.

The power connection for the MRSC cannot be connected to the MRC line distribution or
the ECA cabinet.

 The power supply for the MRSC and other customer related peripheral devices (e.g print‐
er, video etc.) has to be provided on-site. It is not possible to connect the above men‐
tioned devices to our built-in power distribution.

If the Helium compressor is supplied with power again, e.g., after a power failure, the
Helium compressor will start automatically.
To achieve this function, the on-site power distribution panel should not contain any re‐
lays that trip with a power failure and do not come up again automatically when the


mains power comes back again.
Due to local guidelines and regulations there are cases, e.g., EPO circuit, which require
relays. In those cases, the main relay has to be activated actively with a “switch-on” but‐
ton after the power is back on again.
To prevent Helium boil-off, the available potential free alarm contact (if used) will give
an indication of the absence of power.

[Link] On-site power requirement

Recommen‐ Connection val‐ Momentary Internal line

System ded fuse rate ue power impedance
100A (NH-
ECA + ICS-active </= 45 kVA 65 kVA < 200 mOhm
Type)
100A (NH-
ECA + ICS-passive </= 40 kVA 65 kVA < 200 mOhm
Type)

For MAGNETOM ESSENZA installations with passive cooling the Stepping Transformer
 (PN: 56 72 378) has to be ordered and installed for all nominal voltage/frequency combi‐
nations other than 400V/50Hz and 480V/60Hz!

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 150 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 151

Recommended fuse rate

The conductor size of the main connection line should be selected to ensure that the
maximum voltage drop is less than 4%, including the source impedance, feeders, and any
transformers. Fuse rating to be selected in order to protect the mains connection line
conductors and to supply the momentary current. This is valid for the on-site power in‐
stallation (e.g., hospital).

Connection value
Long-term average in full operation at nominal voltage.

The connection value stands for the MR-system components only. You have to add addi‐
tional component values (e.g. air conditioning) for obtaining the total connection value.

 This applies also for use with a UPS system. If the MR system is connected to a UPS sys‐
tem, the chiller should also be connected to the UPS system. In this case a UPS system
with a suitable capacity has to be used.

Momentary power
Momentary power during measurement sequences (< 5 sec.), relevant for maximum volt‐
age drop calculation over the mains connection line and UPS size selection.

Recommended RCD (country related)

RCD = residual current operated protective device

Specification for RCD

Rated Voltage Tripping Nominal cur‐ Nominal residu‐
Type
Range [UN] time limit rent [IN] al current [IΔN]
Type “B”
4-poles
selective,
n and/or
short-time delay
308 V to 480 V switch-off
(according to the < 40 ms for sinusoidal
n AC
used line voltage residual currents 0.03 A
in your country
for purge
n and
pulsating DC re‐
sidual lcurrents
Surge-Protected
n

Nominal current 100 A

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 151 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
152 3 Preparation for installation

 The used RCD has to be type B suitable for “surge currents” and suitable for values men‐
tioned in the specifications.

Circuit breaker

Circuit breaker
Nominal current 100A (NH-Type)

 If as an alternative or in addition (country related) to the EPO circuit, a power switch is

installed, the power switch must not trip at currents lower than 400A eff.

[Link] Average power consumption

Estimated average Value

power consumption measured at 400 V / 50 Hz
ICS-passive 50 ICS-passive 60 ICS-active 50 ICS-active 60
Hz Hz Hz Hz
System off1 6.5 kW 8.5 kW 15.0 kW 20.0 kW
Standby 6.8 kW 8.8 kW 15.3 kW 20.3 kW
Ready for measurement 9.0 kW 11.0 kW 18.8 kW 23.8 kW
Typical measurement 11.1 kW 13.1 kW 21.3 kW 25.3 kW
Highest average power 21.7 kW 23.7 kW 30.5 kW 35.5 kW

1. Helium compressor and cold head only; operational 24 h/day.

 The average power consumption of the systems differs based on the type of sequences,
parameters and applications used.

[Link] Mains connection of the system

Requirements
Cable size Type Wires Comments
4 From on-site power
35 mm2 shielded
(3 phase/ground) supply to the ECA

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 152 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 153

A shielded power cable is required for connecting the MR system to the mains. (From
the on-site power distribution panel to the mains connection terminal of the MR sys‐
tem.)

 If a UPS system is connected to the MR system, a shielded power cable is required be‐
tween the UPS and the MR system.
The shield, or if installed, the conduit has to be connected to ground at the on-site distri‐
bution panel site.

Service line
The permissible magnetic flux density B (magnetic induction) for the AC and three-phase
power meters is:

B ≤ 2 mT

Magnetic shielding has to be provided at higher magnetic flux densities, because they im‐
pair the functions of the AC and three-phase power meters.

3.5.3 On-site power distribution panel

[Link] Function of the Siemens SIRIUS Circuit

For safety reasons, we recommend installing the SIEMENS SIRIUS Relay Circuit into the
on-site power distributor.
Function of the Siemens SIRIUS Circuit
n Switching on:
Actuate the ON button to close contactor K1, thus switching on the entire system.
n Switching off:
Switching off is via the OFF button, which disconnects contactor K1.
n Automatic reactivation following a power outage:If the input voltage drops while the
system is switched on, the system will switch itself on again automatically via K1
when power returns.
n Emergency shutdown:
The EMERGENCY OFF button (EPO) disconnects KI and the entire system along with it.
After actuation of the EMERGENCY OFF button, the ON button must be activated in
order to power up the system again.
 The Siemens SIRIUS Logic Circuit can be ordered at H WS SP AS with the following
Partnumber: 105 627 98

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 153 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
154 3 Preparation for installation

A test jack (4 mm pin plug) should be installed on the outside cover of the distribution


panel with easy access. This jack has to be connected to the ground bus of the distribu‐
tion panel.
This is for measuring the ground connection.

Tab. 24 SIEMENS SIRIUS Relay Circuit

Designation Description
Main components The SIEMENS SIRIUS safety relay circuit consists of the following 3
and function main components
n SITOP 24-VDC power supply
- Function Power supply for SIRIUS safety relay.
n SIRIUS safety relay
- Function Logic component for ON/OFF and EPO function.
This component distinguishes switching off via ON/OFF
switch, EPO, or power failure at customer site. If there are er‐
rors the line voltage power supply relays/contactors reactivate
automatically.
n Control relay K1
- Function Control relay for line voltage power relay/contactor
K2.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 154 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 155

Designation Description
DIP switch The DIP switches must absolutely be set into the position as shown
(on SIRIUS relay) in the following drawing:
Fig. 120: DIP switch in SIRIUS safety relay - settings

NOTE: If the DIP switches are not exactly set in the position as
shown in the drawing the safety circuit will not work.
Order procedure The 3 following safety devices can be ordered in 1 package only
and are available as a kit:
n SITOP 24-VDC power supply
- SIEMENS type designation: 6EP1333-3BA00
n SIRIUS safety relay
- SIEMENS type designation: 3TK2826-1CW30
n Control relay K1
- SIEMENS type designation: 3RT1017-1BB44-3MA0
NOTE: The devices must be ordered in 1 complete kit and can‐
not be ordered separately as single parts.
Source of supply (kit):
n Order designation: SIEMENS SIRIUS Relay Circuit
n SAP order number: 10562798
n Order location/Dept.: H WS SP AS, Erlangen

[Link] Diagram (examples only!)

The MR system uses only a supply line L1, L2, L3 and ground (PE). Neutral is not re‐
quired. In some countries, neutral is used (due to country-specific regulations) in the on-

 site power distribution panel (e.g., for FI installation). The neutral cannot be connected
to our system (mains box)! If a 5-conductor cable is used, neutral (N) is not connected at
the MR system. The example shown is for European country-specific regulations only
and is not mandatory.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 155 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
 156

(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
Power supply MAGNETOM ESSENZA
3/N/PE AC 50/60 Hz ± 1 Hz Connection value: System active
400 V ± 10 % 45 kVA

MAGNETOM
100 A Power consumption:
max. 2 %
for time up to < 5 s: 65 kVA
4 x 35 mm² shielded
= 200 m?

Electrical Installation according to DIN VDE 0100-710 or to national guidelines

PE N L1 L2 L3 Power supply
for MR-System
Proposal for Power Distributor
contains minimum requirement

To extraneous conductive parts

PE

09.14
4A
min.
16? Cu 25 A NH 100 A NH
PA

RCD residual current device 40 A, 30 mA Type B

2 3

RCD residual current device 100 A, 30 mA Type B

4
L2/L3
L1
L1 L2 PE A1+ 13 Y12 T1 Y33 T3 1
4
1 230 - 500 VAC 13

M4-[Link].02
3 Preparation for installation

K1 SIEMENS SIEMENS K1
2 SIRIUS DIP 14
switches
Fig. 121: On site power distribution example ICS-active system

K2 DEVICE 1 on

Fuses according to local and national regulations and guidelines

N 5 OUT 2 on
IN 3 off
K2 SF 4 on
6 5 on
7 6 on

SITOP
7 on
8 off

CS SD MR
+ - A2- Y22 T2 Y34 14
2 3

Page 156 of 392

21

K2 K1
1 22
8
PE N L1
Standard
by customer Power supply RF-cabin
for Room light in RF-cabin
PE 5x1,5?

PE L1 L2 L3
by SIEMENS
shielded
35 mm² electric cable
MR System

X2
UPS
Connection box

Restricted
© Siemens, 2007
 Preparation for installation 3 157

(5) Conductor/power relay according to Fuses according to local and national regulations and guidelines
(6) power supply for SIRIUS relay
(7) SIRIUS Relay
(8) Control Relay
(9) AT = Emergency Power Off (EPO) button with locking mechanism
(10) EAT = On/Off push button with switch position indicator
(11) PA = Local equipotential bus bar

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 157 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
 158

(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
Power supply MAGNETOM ESSENZA
Mains: 3/N/PE AC 50/60 Hz ± 1 Hz Connection value: System passive
Voltage: 400 V ± 10 % 40 kVA

MAGNETOM
On site circuit breaker: 100 A Power consumption:
Line to line unbalanced : max. 2 %
for time up to < 5 s: 65 kVA
Supply System: 4 x 35 mm² shielded
Internal line resistance : = 200 m?

To extraneous parts
Electrical Installation according to DIN VDE 0100-710 or to national guidelines
PE N L1 L2 L3 Power supply
for MR-System
Proposal for Power Distributor
contains minimum requirement

PE

09.14
4A
min.
16? Cu 25 A NH 100 A NH
PA

RCD residual current device 40 A, 30 mA Type B

2 3

RCD residual current device 100 A, 30 mA Type B

4
L2/L3
L1
L1 L2 PE A1+ 13 Y12 T1 Y33 T3 1
4
1 230 - 500 VAC 13

M4-[Link].02
3 Preparation for installation

K1 SIEMENS SIEMENS K1
2 SIRIUS DIP 14
switches
K2 DEVICE 1 on

Fuses according to local and national guidelines and regulations

N 5 OUT 2 on
IN 3 off
K2 SF 4 on
6 5 on
Fig. 122: On site power distribution panel example ICS passive system

7 6 on

SITOP
7 on
8 off

CS SD MR
+ - A2- Y22 T2 Y34 14
2 3
21

Page 158 of 392

K2 K1
1 22
8
PE N L1
Standard
by customer Power supply RF-cabin
for Room light in RF-cabin
PE 5x1,5?

PE L1 L2 L3
by SIEMENS
shielded
35 mm² electric cable
MR System

X2
UPS
Connection box

Restricted
© Siemens, 2007
 Preparation for installation 3 159

(5) Contactor/power relay Fuses according to local and national guidelines and regulations
(6) 24 VDC power supply for the SIRIUS Relay
(7) SIRIUS relay
(8) Control Relay
(9) AT = Emergency Power Off (EPO)
(10) EAT = On/OFF push button with switch position indicator
(11) PA = Loacal equipotential bus bar

If a small UPS (for the host PC) is supplying the system, pressing the EPO button inter‐
 rupts the power supply between the “Distribution Box” and the CCA (Symphony) or ACC
(TIM-Systems) cabinet.

[Link] EPO and line power on/off

The installation of EPO (Emergency Power Off) buttons for the MR-system is mandatory!
The locations must be:

 -Examination room
-Operator's room
-Equipment room

 The on-site power supply has to be switched on or off via an ON/OFF button which
should be located in the line power distribution panel which is feeding the MR sys‐
tem.

 The MR system is switched on or off via the button on the alarm box supplied with the
system.

 Install the EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN buttons (EPO) in the MR suite in accordance

with the project plans. The EPO buttons are mandatory. In some countries, they
are not required, but due to our requirement they must be installed. Follow local
regulations and guidelines.
 The MR system should be shut down via the shutdown circuitry (Emergency SHUT‐
DOWN button) in emergencies only. The refrigerator is switched off in emergency
cases, which means that the helium boil-off rate increases considerably.

If a small UPS (for the host PC) is supplying the system, pressing the EPO button inter‐
 rupts the power supply between the “Distribution Box” and the CCA (Symphony) or
EPC/ACC (TIM-Systems) cabinet.

 If a UPS is connected to the system it has to also be shut off via the emergency power off
buttons (EPO).

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 159 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
160 3 Preparation for installation

If as an alternative or in addition (country related) to the EPO circuit, a power switch is

 installed, the power switch must not trip at currents lower than 400A eff. The circuit
breaker must be suitable for 160A.

 Ensure that the MR system cannot be switched on accidentally after, e.g., the Emergen‐
cy shutdown button (EPO) has been unlocked/reactivated.

All emergency stop buttons must be mounted in such a manner as to be easily accessi‐
 ble. Locations should be chosen that will prevent accidental shutdown of the system. All
buttons must have "guards" installed to prevent accidental depression of the button(s).

[Link] Planning prerequisites for Application Group 2 (AG2)

 In general the MR system can be installed in Application Group 2 examination rooms.

The use of the MR system as an application group 2 device requires that the customer be
notified that the MR system can be operated via a safety voltage supply (e.g. UPS). Sys‐
tem-related requirements to be met by the voltage supply are included in the Planning
Guide (PG). The customer can also order the UPS released by GG MR via the price book.
However, these safety voltage supplies are not part of the standard delivery of MR sys‐

 tems. The customer has to be informed that an MR system without UPS buffering cannot
be operated immediately after a short-term power failure. Instead the system will have
to be booted for several minutes.
In addition the operator has to ensure that explosive anesthetic gases (and other explo‐
sive gases) are not used or that explosive gas mixtures are not generated in the exami‐
nation room.

 The following information must be passed on to the customer, if AG2 is required:

n The MR system is a medical device whose safety is tested according to IEC 60601. It
can be part of application group 2, if it is connected to a TN-S voltage supply and if the
device is protected via a FI switch. It does not matter that the protection against con‐
tact in the MR system is configured as protective grounding of conductible parts and
power supply is switched off directly in case of overload or short-circuits. This does
not involve the safety concept of other (possible life-supporting) medical devices that
are connected to residual current operated protective devices (RCDs) and whose pro‐
tective grounding is connected to the MR system.
n The customer has to be informed that the type of configuration of the MR system
does not meet the requirements for medical electrical systems to be used in explo‐
sion-protected rooms. It has to be assumed that imaging sparks may be generated
anywhere in the examination room (within the Faraday cage). As a result, the opera‐
tor has to ensure that explosive anesthetic gases are not used or that explosive gas
mixtures are not generated in the examination room.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 160 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 161

n When the MR system is used during surgical invasion, our risk management has to de‐
scribe how we prevent that the functions of the MR system or the operating table con‐
nected to it are limited by discharged liquids.
n The MR OR table developed by us can be supplied by the MR system. A residual cur‐
rent-operated protective device is not required. In case of power failure or short-circuit
outside the immediate vicinity of the OR table, continuous operation of the OR table is
possible until the patient can be safely rescued during the OR. In case, the MR system
is connected to a safety voltage supply, the OR table is operational for the (remaining)
period of operation of the MR system, since it is supplied with power. Essentially, the
period of operation is determined by the use of the MR system during the power fail‐
ure and the installed accumulator capacity, or the configuration of the backup power
supply (e.g. UPS).

3.5.4 Grounding
Siemens Medical Solutions products are sophisticated electronic systems that require at‐
tention to grounding to ensure optimal equipment performance and reliability.
Equipment grounds to Siemens equipment are specified to be "isolated" types as permit‐
ted in NEC 250-96(b) for the reduction of electrical noise.
In order to maintain the integrity of the RF-shielded examination room, the ground must
originate at the Siemens electronics cabinet ground bus (ACC cabinet), and should be
connected at both ends under Siemens supervision.
Non-current carrying conductive surfaces have to be grounded via a #6 a.w.g. insulated
green copper conductor installed in the metal raceway that contains the branch-circuit
conductors supplying the equipment.
A neutral conductor, if present, is not used for the line voltage connection to the Siemens
equipment. If the neutral conductor is provided, it should not be electrically connected at
any point in the power distribution to Siemens equipment, unless specifically required.
Unintentional neutral-to-ground bonds may violate local and national electrical codes and
result in grounding problems.
The grounding of the system, especially the facility ground provided, should be prepared
in compliance with local regulations.
The internal grounding of the MR system must be set up with minimum ground loops in
order to prevent noise currents and general disturbances from flowing through the
grounding path.

[Link] Grounding points

To achieve such a grounding, three major grounding points should be used:

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 161 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
162 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 123: System Grounding Concept

1. The facility ground provided in the distribution panel.

2. The main grounding point at the ECA cabinet should be directly connected to (1).
3. The RF room common grounding point at the RF penetration panel should be directly
connected to the main ground connection at the ECA cabinet (2).
4. An optional UPS system should be connected as well to (1).
To check for possible ground loops, the ground resistance between the RF cabin (3) and
the facility ground (1) should be checked prior to switching on the system. The minimum
resistance between (1) and (3) without connected ground wire should be at least 100
Ohm. After having measured that all ground wires should be connected, the maximum
resistance between any two points on the grounding system should not exceed 200
mOhm.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 162 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 163

Additional electrical equipment installed inside the RF cabin should use RF filters mounted
on the filter panel. These additional filters should be grounded as well to the RF room
common ground.
Any modifications or non-MR equipment grounds added to the MR ground system must
be approved by Siemens representative to guarantee system safety and performance.

3.5.5 Customer RF filter connection

[Link] RF filter for customer use

It is recommended to install a separate RF filter panel for the on-site filtering of customer


components, e.g., for room lighting.
The implemented blind plates on the RF filter panel and the spare RF-filters are for Sie‐
mens use, e.g., future options only.

Usage filter
Z 19
Z 20
Z 21
Spare; for Siemens Options only
Z 22
Z 23
Z 24

Hazardous conditions are created by the magnetic field when connecting devices made
from magnetizable material to the receptacles installed in the examination room.
In addition, the functionality of electrical devices, e.g., servo ventilators, may be affected


by the magnetic field if the devices are not suitable for this type of operation.
The user is responsible for the installation and use of receptacles in the examination
room as well as damage resulting from said use.
In addition, the on-site electrical system has to conform to Application group 2 when life
supporting systems are used in the examination room.

Power outlets inside the examination room have to be connected through extra RF-fil‐


ters, an insulation transformer and a leakage current detector may be required if Appli‐
cation group 2 applies.
Local requirements have to be met.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 163 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
164 3 Preparation for installation

[Link] RF filter 6A/25A

RF filters have to be installed, for example if a fire alarm or other electrical devices will be
installed in the examination room.

 It is not recommended that you install additional RF filters on the RF filter panel. This will
conflict with the upgrade ability.

Ordering information

Part number Max. voltage Max. current

46 84 866 250 V 6A
31 62 567 250 V 25 A

Specifications 25 A

25 A filter specifications
U rated (rated voltage) 250 V AC
I rated (rated current) 25 A
Capacitance against ground 0.2 µF
Longitudinal inductivity n.a.
Insertion loss (10-130MHz) > 105 dB

Specifications 6A

6A filter specifications
U rated (rated voltage) 250 V AC
I rated (rated current) 6A
Capacitance against ground 1.0 µF
Longitudinal inductivity 60.0 µH
Insertion loss (10-130MHz > 105 dB

3.5.6 Alarm contact

 The ACC cabinet is equipped with one potential-free alarm contact X119.
n The contact (X119) is for remote alarm of the following malfunctions:
- Helium level warning and alarm

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 164 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 165

- Shield Temperature
- Magnet and helium compressor over and under pressure

[Link] Connection details

Specifications for X119

Connector type HANQ 5
230 V
Load
10 A
not protected by a fuse

Configuration X119 (HANQ 5)

Status Pin Pin Contact
1 31 Closed
normal
2 3 Open
1 3 Open
alarm
2 3 Closed

1. Pin 3 is common.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 165 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
166 3 Preparation for installation

3.6 On-site water installation

3.6.1 General information

An on-site water supply (e.g., chiller, central chilled water supply) is required for operat‐
ing the MR system. To guarantee failure-free operation of the water cooling circuit, and
the water-cooled components listed in the table, the primary chilled water supply has to
comply with the specifications listed in this document.( Water-cooled compo‐
nents / Page 167).
Two solutions of on-site water supply are feasible:

1. ICS-passive when central primary chilled water supply (e.g., in hospitals) is already
available.
2. A local chiller is already available (must fulfill Siemens specifications).
3. Chilled primary water supply is not available and has to be built up with the dedicated
ICS-active

In Germany, DIN 1988 "Technical guideline for tap water installations" should be part of

 the planning phase.

Local/country specific regulations/codes will apply in all other countries.

Tab. 25 Water cooling solutions

Available solutions Required system components

Central hospital cooling water supply available ICS-passive
Local chiller is available ICS-passive
No chilled water is available ICS-active

The pipe/hose dimension between the chiller or central water supply and ICS-passive


must be 1 inch. If other diameters are used, the function of the water cooling circuit will
be affected.
Check the use of the correct pipe/hose size during the planning/installation phase.

The delivered water hoses for connecting the ICS-passive primary circuit are equipped
with shut-off valves for the forward and return pipes. This is to be able to change the

 ICS-passive cabinet and maintain the primary strainer, if required.

The 1 inch on-site pipes for the primary water connection must have a female thread at
the connection to the ICS.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 166 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 167

 Fro filling the secondary water circuit use only pure or distilled water!

[Link] Water-cooled components

 The helium compressor requires chilled water 24 hours a day.

 With the ICS-passive and ICS-active configuration, all Siemens system components which
are water-cooled are connected to the secondary water circuit.

The following components are connected to the secondary water cooling circuit.
Tab. 26 Water-cooled components

Refrigerating capacity
Component Volume flow [l/min]
[kW]
Gradient coil / RFIS 14-20 < 7.0
GPA 15-25 < 5.0
ACS 8-12 < 2.0
RFPA 8-12 < 0.7
Refrigerator 8-12 < 6.0

 If the system is switched “Off” (i.e., water pump is not running), a static overpressure of
1.0 to 1.5 bar is present in the secondary water circuit.

3.6.2 Primary water specifications

[Link] Adapter for primary chilled water supply (ICS-passive)

 For connecting the ICS-passive water hoses to the on site chilled water supply the
following adapter are part of the delivery volume:
-Adapter DIN inch DN28 to 1”, NPT thread; Material number: 104 328 83 (US)
-Adapter DIN inch DN28 to G1”, straight thread; Material number: 104 328 84
(ROW)

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 167 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
168 3 Preparation for installation

[Link] Piping material specification


Pay attention to the use/not use of the materials listed in the table for the pipe work
( Piping material specification / Page 168).

The water circuit between chiller or central water supply and ICS-passive has to be flush‐

 ed before connecting.
The cooling water used has to meet Siemens specifications.

Tab. 27 Piping material

Recommended material Not recommended material

Stainless steel (V2A; V4A) Aluminum
Non-ferrous metal (e.g., copper, brass) Iron, carbon steel
Synthetic materials, plastics Zinc-plated steel
Brazing solder, hard solder Zinc
Fitting solder, types 3 and 4 Standard steel pipes

All pipes for the primary water supply have to be identified with labels. The flow direc‐
 tion of the cooling media has to be identified as well. Local requirements have to be
met.

[Link] Primary water quality specification

 The following specifications are valid for all chilled water circuits.

Tab. 28 Water quality specifications

Central water supply to ICS-passive

pH value 6-8
Hardness < 250 ppm CaCO3 (calcium carbonate)
< 14˚ dH (German hardness)
Water to be used Tap water water for initial filling
Chlorine gas concentration chlorine portion < 200 ppm
Filtration 500 μm 1
Water pressure max. 6 bar

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 168 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 169

Pressure loss Across ICS-passive: typical 0.3 bar (< 1.0 bar)
Anti-freeze concentration for primary 40% ethylene glycol / 60% water
water circuit:
(ethylene glycol / water)

1. The installed strainer does apply to this value.

[Link] Primary water supply specification

The ICS-passive is used in building environments where an existing central water cooling
unit or a chiller with the required specifications is already available. The ICS-passive is the
interface unit between the on-site water supply and the MR system.

Two possibilities can be selected for the system cooling configuration:

 1: ICS-passive; standard configuration

2: ICS-active; optional

Primary chilled water solution

1 2
ICS-passive; standard con‐ ICS-active & external fan
figuration unit
ICS-passive cabinet ICS-active cabinet
Required components On-site provided chilled
External fan unit
water
Heat dissipation to primary
21 kW 21 kW
water
Primary water flow rate 30 l/min. Cannot be manipulated
Primary water supply tempera‐
6˚C to 12˚C Cannot be manipulated
ture
Water temperature gradient n.a. Cannot be manipulated
Pressure loss < 1.0 bar Cannot be manipulated
Primary water pressure max. 6.0 bar max. 6.0 bar

For initial filling of the secondary water circuit a industrial/process water connection has

 to be in the range of 20.0 m distance from the ICS cabinet.

Do not connect to drinking water systems!

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 169 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
170 3 Preparation for installation

3.7 On-site air conditioning installation

3.7.1 General information

The capacity of the air-conditioning system is based on the:
n heat dissipation from the MR system
n heat dissipation from the room lights of the examination room
n heat generated by adjacent rooms or sun light
The air conditioning system selected should be designed to permit future expansion. In
addition, the system should be equipped with sensors that automatically switch off the
air conditioning in case of errors. The temperature and humidity values should be recor‐
ded by a thermo-hydrography to ensure that the data required is available for trouble‐
shooting.
The MR system is cooled most effectively when the system components are installed at
the prescribed distances from the walls or ceiling.
If the input draws upon air from outside the building, we recommend installing an on-site
filter of EU filter class 4 to remove dust particles > 10 µm.

[Link] Air-conditioning requirements

The air-conditioning unit has to be configured according to local/country/hospital-specif‐

 ic regulations/codes,
e.g. DIN 1946 (Germany).

n maximum room temperature deviations should be less than 3oC.

n air current speed in locations used by personnel should be less than 0.2 m/second.

A minimum fresh air exchange rate, related to the examination room volume, of mini‐
mum 6 times per hour is mandatory.

 Higher fresh air exchange rates might be required due to local regulations or the system
usage.
It is recommended that you install fresh air systems (30% to 50% fresh air intake with an
air exchange rate of 10 times per hour).

It is important for fresh air intake systems to deflect the exhaust air of the examination
 room directly out of the building. The exhaust air of the examination room must not be
deflected into another room!

 The off-take opening (exhaust) of the air conditioning system in the examination room
must not be installed lower than 2000mm.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 170 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 171

The air intake of the air conditioning system must not be located in close vicinity to the


quench vent outlet.
This is to prevent sthat helium gas is sucked inot the air conditioning system ucking in
Helium gas into the air conditioning in the event of a quench.

It may be required to have an air off-take and intake connection within the suspended
 ceiling as well. The reason for this is the heat dissipation of the magnet electronics com‐
ponents into the suspended ceiling via the adjustable magnet tower cover.

3.7.2 Climate conditions

The MR system environment is divided into four areas:

1. Examination room
2. Equipment room
3. Operator's room
4. Evaluation room

It is recommended that you install an air conditioning system for the examination room
 separately from all other rooms. This air conditioning unit should have direct vent access
to the outside of the building.

 If the values for temperature or humidity are exceeded, condensation will be created.

[Link] Climate specifications

Room climate specifications

Tab. 29 Room climate specifications

Examination room Equipment room Control room

Evaluation room
Room temperature +18˚C to +22˚C +15˚C to +30˚C
Temperature gradient n.a. </= 3.0 K/5 min. n.a.
Barometric pressure 700 to 1060 hPascal 1
Relative humidity 40% - 60% 40% - 80%

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 171 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
172 3 Preparation for installation

Examination room Equipment room Control room

Evaluation room
Absolute humidity < 11.5 g/kg
Heat dissipation to air 3.0 kW 3.0 kW 2.0 kW

1. 700 hPascal is equivalent to a height of about 3000 m above sea level.

Heat dissipation of components to air

 To calculate the total heat load of the examination room, you need to add additional
emission values, e.g., for room lighting, to the system component heat emission.

Tab. 30 Examination room - heat dissipation to air

Components in the exami‐

Heat emission
nation room
Magnet
Patient table
RF electronics
RF filter panel
Total value 3.0 kW

Tab. 31 Equipment room - heat dissipation to air

Components in equipment
Heat emission
room
ECA
ICS-passive
ICS-active
RF filter panel
Total value 3.0 kW

Tab. 32 Operator room - heat dissipation to air

Components in operator
Heat emission
room

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 172 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 173

Host computer
Monitor
Console components
Intercom
Total value 2.0 kW

Tab. 33 Evaluation room - heat dissipation to air

Components in evaluation
Heat emission
room
Host computer
Monitor
Console components
Total value 2.0 kW

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 173 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
174 3 Preparation for installation

Absolute humidity - Molier diagram

Fig. 124: Molier diagram

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 174 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 175

3.8 RF shielding enclosure

3.8.1 RF room manufacturer's information

For budgetary planning of RF cabins in the SEA region, please see the price table below
for standard configuration with basic data as follows:
n RF shield system installation and RF-attenuation test
n RF-shielding with outside dimensions approx. l x w x h: 6.59 x 4.09 x 2.75 m
n RF-door approx. w x h: 1.20 x 2.10m, RF-window approx. w x h: 1.20 x 0.90 m
n Honey comb grid, waveguide for optical fibers, medical gases and other applications
n Interior finishing: - Internal flooring, - Internal walls, - Suspended Ceiling with sound
proofing options, Lighting, Quench pipe 1.5 m, Delivery CIF

The following table is an example taken from the MAGNETOM Avanto system and for in‐

 formation only.
It is valid for the SEA region!

Tab. 34 For information only!

EXAMPLES only!
RF-cabin from Chinese Manufacturer For To Destina‐ Price as per
MR-System tion: August 2006
Price CIF:
Type:

Albatross Projects (Shanghai) Ltd. Avanto China, $21.200

Shanghai
IMEDCO Technology (Shenzhen) Co. Ltd Avanto China, $29.994
Shanghai
Lindgren China [Link] Lindgren Avanto China, $41.000
EM Technology Company Ltd [Link] Shanghai
Lindgren Technical Service Company

Albatross Projects (Shanghai) Ltd. Avanto India, Mum‐ $47.320

bai
IMEDCO Technology (Shenzhen) Co. Ltd Avanto India, Mum‐ $51.317
bai
Lindgren China [Link] Lindgren Avanto India, Mum‐ $43.500
EM Technology Company Ltd [Link] bai
Lindgren Technical Service Company

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 175 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
176 3 Preparation for installation

EXAMPLES only!
RF-cabin from Chinese Manufacturer For To Destina‐ Price as per
MR-System tion: August 2006
Price CIF:
Type:
Albatross Projects (Shanghai) Ltd. Avanto Indonesia, $47.320
Jakarta
IMEDCO Technology (Shenzhen) Co. Ltd. Avanto Indonesia, $49.728
Jakarta
Lindgren China [Link] Lindgren Avanto Indonesia, $43.000
EM Technology Company Ltd [Link] Jakarta
Lindgren Technical Service Company

Albatross Projects (Shanghai) Ltd. Avanto Malaysia, $47.320

Kuala Lum‐
pur
IMEDCO Technology (Shenzhen) Co. Ltd Avanto Malaysia, $49.486
Port Kelang
Lindgren China [Link] Lindgren Avanto Malaysia, $44.000
EM Technology Company Ltd [Link] Kuala Lum‐
Lindgren Technical Service Company pur

Albatross Projects (Shanghai) Ltd. Avanto South Ko‐ $47.320

rea, Seoul
IMEDCO Technology (Shenzhen) Co. Ltd Avanto South Ko‐ $50.927
rea, Seoul
Lindgren China [Link] Lindgren Avanto South Ko‐ $42.000
EM Technology Company Ltd [Link] rea, Seoul
Lindgren Technical Service Company

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 176 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 177

3.8.2 RF room prerequisites

The operator of the system has to prepare an “Emergency Plan” for the event of a
quench. The details for generating such an “Emergency Plan” can be found in the “Oper‐
ator Manual”.
The “Emergency Plan” should including a situation in which the venting system for the


superconducting magnet fails to function adequately.
Measures for temperature decrease of, e.g., the quench tube surface (insulation of the
quench tube) during a quench are listed in ( Quench Line Design Instruc‐
tions / Page 194).
Measures for reducing the pressure build-up or oxygen depletion are given in ( Pres‐
sure equalization and Oxygen depletion reduction / Page 181).

n RF shielding is required in the examination room, because

- all international and/or national RF guidelines for the prevention of RF interference
caused by MR system operation have to be observed
- interference-free operation of the MR system despite RF interference in the operat‐
ing frequency range of the installation has to be ensured. Route all electrical lines in
the RF room via RF filters.
n Equip doors leading to the RF room with a limit switch.
n To prevent extraneous electrical fields in the examination room, the following should
not be installed or used:
- Telephone connections
- Extensions for in-house intercom systems
- Fluorescent lights
- Energy-saving light bulbs
n The RF integrity has to be tested and the filter plate has to be installed after comple‐
tion of the RF room. Requirements regarding RF-shielding

By using a suitable design as well as maintenance plan, the manufacturer of the RF cabin
has to ensure that the following operate without fail:

 the door locking, especially the door handle and locking mechanism so as to secure con‐
tinuous access to the patient in the examination room for emergency care and evacua‐
tion.

The opening direction of the RF door has to be to the outside of the RF room. As an alter‐
native other appropriate means have to be provided to ensure that pressure built up dur‐
ing a quench, when the venting fails to work adequately, will not prevent the RF door of

 the examination room from being opened.

If, e.g., due to constructional reasons, the RF door opening direction is to the inside of
the RF room, a flap measuring 600 mm x 600 mm has to be integrated into the RF room
door!

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 177 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
178 3 Preparation for installation

If required, the RF room manufacturer has to perform a separate/additional RF at‐

 tenuation measurement after the complete installation of the RF room (magnet is
positioned; RF filter plate is installed).

 To operate the MR system, the RF room has to be grounded at the points specified in the
“Installation Instructions”. All other ground connections are unacceptable.

The RF attenuation of the RF room must be min. 90 dB in the 15 MHz-128 MHz frequen‐

 cy range. The measured value (after installation and clothing of the RF room) must be
stated in the hand-over protocol of the RF room manufacturer. A copy of this protocol
has to be inserted into the “System Owner Manual”.

All components of the RF room and the interior fittings/accessories of the examination
 room have to be made from non-magnetizable material. Follow manufacturer's specifi‐
cations and instructions.

 The floor in the vicinity of the magnet (2.2 m x 4.5 m) must be leveled within max.
+/-2.0 mm.

3.8.3 Attenuation specifications

The RF room manufacturers ensure compliance with the specifications, e.g., 90 dB at‐
tenuation from 15 to 128 MHz of the installed RF shielding (depending on the system
 operating frequency). The RF shielding will be tested by the manufacturer of the RF
room using special measurement devices after the RF room is installed. The test will be
confirmed via a protocol which has to be filed in the customer’s “System Owner Manual”.

 Upon request some of the RF room manufacturers will install the quench tube, air
conditioning and the interior of the RF room. Fringe field measurement and RF
measurements after the complete installation can be ordered from some of the RF
room manufacturers as well.

[Link] Specifications for the RF room

RF room specifications 1
Attenuation > 90 dB
Frequency range in steps 15 MHz to 128 MHz
Floor evenness 2 +/- 2.0 mm

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 178 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 179

RF room specifications 1
RF room isolation isolated from the on-site ground
Resistance between the RF room > 100 Ohm
and the central protective ground
of the system

1. The specification of the RF room attenuation has to be maintained across the RF room and its lifetime. If
required measures have to be taken to fulfill this requirement (e.g. refer to the manufacturers mainte‐
nance instructions)
2. This applies in the area of the magnet position (2.4 m x 4.5 m).

RF room frequency specifications

Element Frequency
min. frequency 15.0 MHz
17 O
13 C 16.0 MHz
23 Na 16.8 MHz
129 Xe 17.6 MHz
7 Li 24.7 MHz
31 P 25.7 MHz
3 He 48.4 MHz
19 F 59.8 MHz
1H 63.6 MHz
max. frequency 128.0 MHz

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 179 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
180 3 Preparation for installation

[Link] RF door opening

Fig. 125: RF-room, example

The opening direction of the RF door has to be to the outside of the RF room. As an alter‐
native, other appropriate means have to be provided to ensure that pressure built up
during a quench, if the venting fails to work adequately, will not prevent the RF door of
the examination room from being opened.
 An opening in the RF room measuring 600 mm x 600 mm has be installed, if the RF door
opens to the inside of the examination room! This is mandatory!
An opening of 600 mm x 600 mm is recommended, even if the door opens to the out‐
side.

By using a suitable design as well as maintenance plan, the manufacturer of the RF cabin
has to ensure that the following operate without fail:

 the door locking, especially the door handle and locking mechanism so as to secure con‐
tinuos access to the patient in the examination room for emergency care and evacua‐
tion.

 If your RF room door opens to the inside, your RF room manufacturer may be able
to provide you with subsequent improvements. For new systems, the following
are considered standard safety measures. We recommend that you upgrade older
systems to these standards.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 180 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 181

Pressure equalization and Oxygen depletion reduction

 Measures for reducing oxygen depletion in the event of a quench are a functional air-
conditioning (adequate air exchange rate) system and the functional quench tube.

n The door is configured/modified so that it opens to the outside and into the control
room.
n The door is replaced with an RF-sealed sliding door. It should be ensured that the door
closes in a way that allows it to move away from the frame in case of overpressure,
that is, it facilitates opening the door.
n The stationary observation window is replaced by a window opening into the control
room.
n An opening in the RF room measuring 600 mm x 600 mm has be installed, if the RF
door opens to the inside of the examination room! These panels require an RF-sealed
installation. After opening the panel, the outlet should measure at least 600mm x 600
mm. When using rectangular panels, the shorter side should measure a minimum of
600 mm in length. To ensure unobstructed venting, this opening cannot be subdivi‐
ded. This means that, e.g., RF-sealed honeycomb grids are not permitted. Also, easy
removal of the panel by a person has to be ensured. In addition, a minimum distance
of 1 meter to the next wall needs to be observed. The panel should be installed as far
as possible toward the top to allow escape of low-density helium.
n If your RF room door opens to the inside, your RF room manufacturer may be able to
provide you with subsequent improvements. However, these openings are also con‐
duits for noise generated outside the RF room. The panel should be installed as far as
possible toward the top to allow escape of low-density helium. To maintain unob‐
structed flow through a pipe, the diameter of a 10 m long line has to measure at least
0.7 m. It is not permitted to use honeycomb grids in this line.
 For doors moved via auxiliary drives (e.g. electrical or pneumatic), manual opera‐
tion has to be ensured as well. An outside window should be in the vicinity to al‐
low venting exhausted gas to the outside. After completing the remodeling, the
integrity of the RF shielding has to be tested again. If included in the installation,
the observation window may be pushed in. The window usually includes wiring
for the RF shielding that needs to be worked through as well. However, rescue per‐
sonnel may be injured by the resulting glass splinters. Depending on the construc‐
tion and the thickness of the window, the operator has to provide suitable tools
for breaking the window.

[Link] RF room interior

 The following information is important for a faultless operation of the imaging sys‐
tem!
n Only non-magnetic materials are to be used and installed in the RF room.
n A suspended ceiling must be statically suspended, i.e., not suspended with movable
clamps, springs, etc.
n Corrugated rods in suspended ceilings have to be attached securely (galvanic contact
between the corrugated rods has to be guaranteed, the can't just lie on top of one an‐
other. A wire jumper between the rods may be useful).

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 181 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
182 3 Preparation for installation

n Electrical wiring, e.g., for lights, cannot rest unsecured on the suspended ceiling.

If you expect noise problems, the RF room manufacturer you are using may be able to
 deliver noise reduction components with the RF room (e.g., interior; RF window; RF
door, etc.).

Adhere to the manufacturers guidelines, specifications and/or installation manuals.

 Be sure to include the weight of the RF room and/or external iron shielding and/or noise
reduction material in your static calculations!

 Special devices such as medical gas feed-through or RF filters for, e.g., room lights
could possibly be ordered from your RF room supplier/manufacturer.

[Link] Quench Tube

 Refer to ( Quench Line Design Instructions / Page 194)

The material of the quench tube contracts after a quench. To allow for subsequent mate‐
rial expansion, include an expansion margin for the RF-sealed wave trap of the quench
tube.
 The RF room feed-through needs to conform to certain geometric constraints, in
order to guarantee the RF integrity of the RF room.
 As a function of the inner pipe diameter di the following applies to the minimum
pipe length Lmin for frequencies up to 128 MHz and 110 dB attenuation.

 Lmin = 4.0 X di, whereby: di </= 300 mm

n Bolts are placed at 30 mm distance maximum to ensure RF shielding.

n Depending on RF room designs, RF seals can be required between the mounting
flange and the RF room.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 182 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 183

Fig. 126: Quench tube RF feed-through

(1) Quench tube connection flanges

(2) Connection flange for mounting the feed-through to the RF room

Galvanic separation
Galvanic separation has to be installed to avoid electrical noise being picked up by loops
between the magnet, the quench tube, the RF room and the building.
It is necessary to have one galvanic separation of the quench tube inside and one outside
of the RF room.

[Link] Air conditioning

Feed-through
Honeycomb wave guides consist of a large number of small hollow wave guides. Depend‐
ing on their dimensions, the honeycomb wave guides block certain frequencies. The hon‐
eycomb wave guides are used as RF-sealed feed-through for, e.g., the air intake and ex‐
haust ducts of the air conditioning unit. Refer to the data sheets of the manufacturer for
additional details.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 183 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
184 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 127: Air-conditioning feed-through

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 184 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 185

[Link] Medical gases

Medical gases feed-through

Fig. 128: Medical gases feed-through, example

Fig. 129: Medical gases, example of RF waveguide

Information on medical gases

Our information on medical gases is as follows:
Only licensed firms (e.g., Dräger) are permitted to perform installations.
Up to now there were actually three ways of routing medical gas lines:

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 185 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
186 3 Preparation for installation

n Pipes were comprised solely of plastic tubing and were introduced into the RF room
through a 76 mm feed-through. This is actually the simplest solution from a technical
standpoint.
n Complete line voltage supply in copper tubing within the hospital. Copper tubing also
installed inside the RF room. The RF feed-through from the outside to the inside was
established using the 76 mm feed-through and synthetic tubing. In the area of the
feed-through inside and outside of the RF room, inspection ports are required inside
the suspended ceiling.
n Introducing the copper tubing directly into the RF room via an RF-sealed copper tube
had been planned several times, but was never implemented. A type of mounting
plate was planned upon which the necessary number of copper tubes of the appropri‐
ate diameter would be located. In the majority of cases, diameters of 8, 10, 12, and
14 mm are required for the gases, while diameters of 20 or 25 mm are required for
suction. RF integrity can be calculated precisely using the diameter and length of the
tubing.
The tubing could be connected directly to the mounting plate via the respective fittings.
The only problem with this solution is the galvanic separation of the RF room from the
rest of the building.
All electrically non-conductive supply lines for
n oxygen, anesthetics or
n fiber optic cables, etc.
routed from the outside into the RF room must be fed through electrically conductive
pipes also known as RF-sealed wave guides. They must be either welded to the RF shield‐
ing or attached via screws. The RF-sealed wave guides function as hollow wave guides
that block certain frequencies.
Metal pipes (e.g., technical/medical gases, water, etc.) have to be grounded at the RF
wave guide. All international/national RF regulations and ordinances have to be followed.
Acdurate and interference-free operation of the MAGNETOM system has to be guaran‐
teed.

[Link] Used DIN norms

Shielding attenuation measurements are normally performed in compliance with the fol‐
lowing standards:
n EN 50147-1 (European standard)
n NSA 65-6 (American standard)
n MIL STD 285 (American standard)
n IEEE 299
The various methods for measuring are established and described within the standard. It
is, therefore, common for us to determine certification measurements with the respective
customer as early as the quotation and planning phase.

[Link] Modular RF rooms

The shell of the examination room has to have been completed prior to assembling and
installing the RF room. The wall openings for, e.g., RF room door, view window, air intake
and exhaust ducts, etc., have been made.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 186 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 187

The modular RF room consists of individual sections (modules) made from non-magnetiz‐
able material.
n No special structural requirements are needed for the ceiling and the walls.
n If sections of the completed modular RF room have to be disassembled for installa‐
tion-related reasons, new contact springs have to be used when re-assembling the
sections.
n The modules have to be disassembled in groups from floor to ceiling or up to the re‐
spective corner of the RF room. The same applies to the ceiling panels.

[Link] RF room construction (example)

Fig. 130: RF-room, example

 The floor in the vicinity of the magnet (2.2 m x 4.5 m) must be leveled within maximum
+/- 2.0 mm

Use antistatic floor covering in any case!

 If particle board is used/installed to be sure to meet the specifications of V100 E1 (densi‐

ty 620...800 kg/m3).

 Additional information regarding the shielding for RF rooms may be obtained from
the manufacturer.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 187 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
188 3 Preparation for installation

3.8.4 RF filter plate cut-out

The RF filter plate can be installed in the vertical or horizontal position.

 If the RF filter plate will be installed vertically, the gradient filter position has to be on
top.

Fig. 131: RF-filter plate cut-out

Impact and Vision RF filter plate cut-outs can be adapted to a MAGNETOM ESSENZA RF
filter plate cut-out by using an adapter.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 188 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 189

Fig. 132: RF filter plate adapter

There is an adapter kit available for mounting the MAGNETOM ESSENZA filter plate into
 already existing RF rooms where older Siemens MR system were previously installed. The
part number is: 564 1316.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 189 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
190 3 Preparation for installation

[Link] Cu RF room RF filter panel cut-out

Fig. 133: RF-filter plate installation in a copper RF-room

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 190 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 191

[Link] Cu RF room floor (example)

Fig. 134: RF-room floor example for a copper RF-room

3.8.5 RF room isolation from on-site ground

[Link] Definitions
The RF room is isolated from on-site ground, if the resistance between any of the points
in the RF room and the central protective conductor of the system is greater than or equal
to 100 Ohms.

[Link] Measurement devices

Protective conductor meter.

[Link] Preferred method of measurement

n Construct the RF room and measure the resistance between the RF room and the cen‐
tral protective conductor of the system.
n Measure the resistance between the RF room and the central protective conductor of
the system each time an anchor is set into the floor.
n After completion of the RF room, the resistance between the RF room and the central
protective conductor of the system has to exceed 100 Ohms.
n The RF room cannot be connected to the on-site ground.
n Final measurements with the protective ground meter
- Remove all protective conductor connections to the RF room.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 191 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
192 3 Preparation for installation

- Measure the resistance between the RF room and the on-site ground with the pro‐
tective ground meter.
 The resistance must be >100 Ohms.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 192 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 193

3.8.6 Checklist
Fig. 135: RF-room preparation - check list

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 193 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
194 3 Preparation for installation

3.9 Quench Line Design Instructions

3.9.1 Quench Line Design Instructions

[Link] General
These instructions cover the design requirements for quench pipes installed with a Sie‐
mens Magnet Technology, 1.5 T and 3 T magnets.
During a quench, the thermal energy dissipated causes an extremely rapid expansion of
the liquid helium. The quench line and outlet must be capable of venting a large volume
of gas. The expansion ratio of the helium from liquid at 4.2 K to room temperature is
1:700.
n The volume of gas generated must be safely directed externally to atmosphere and
away from public spaces.

 DANGER
Operational requirements
Risk of series injury or death and collateral damage to the building.
 The quench line is a critical for the safe operation of the magnet.
 The quench line installation must comply with these specifications and in‐
structions IN ALL CASES.
 The project manager (PM) is responsible for the installation, compliance with
the Site Planning Guide and customer sign off.

Responsibilities
The Siemens Project manager is responsible for:
n Installation materials and designs comply with the instructions provided.
n Sign off with the customer for the quench line.
n The quench line calculator and pressure drop in specification.
n The completion of the check list.
n Photographs of the installation and outlet location.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 194 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 195

 WARNING
Unauthorized design and materials
The quench line installation is the responsibility of the Project Manager to check
and sign off before handing over to the customer.
 The PM must ensure that the quench line installation meets the specified de‐
sign requirements.
 The PM must ensure that the quench line passes the quench pressure calcula‐
tor.

 WARNING
Risk of quench line component failure
Failure to use qualified personnel and affiliated companies can result in sub-
standard materials being used in the fabrication of the quench line.
 The welding of Stainless Steel and Aluminium pipes and components must be
performed by suitably qualified and coded engineers.
 Only use the materials specified in these instructions ( Quench Line Materi‐
als / Page 203)

The customer or operator of the MRI system must prepare an “Emergency-Plan”.

 Details for generating a “Emergency-Plan” can be found in the “System Owners Manual
- safety information”.

The customer or operator is responsible for:

n The customer or operator must be aware and responsible for the additional risks when
more than one system (Siemens or OEM) are connected to the same quench line.
n It is the customers responsibility to ensure that any changes to the building or new
external building do not compromise the quench line installation or outlet.
n Changes or additions to the quench line are the responsibility of the customer.
Quench line and building materials must comply with local regulations.
n Only qualified and competent personnel as appointed by the customer can be used
for any changes to the quench line.
n The customer or operator must be aware of the annual maintenance requirements.
n Future maintenance performed by third parties is the responsibility of the customer or
operator.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 195 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
196 3 Preparation for installation

Maintenance

 DANGER
Water and ice blockage in Quench line
High internal pressure from a blockage will cause damage to the magnet system
and quench line during a quench.
 Only use the quench line outlet configurations described.
 Check water or snow cannot ingress into the quench line from the outlet.
 Check the drain hole is free from debris.
 Always perform the annual maintenance checks.

The following checks are the minimum requirement for the preventative maintenance
and safety of the system and quench line. The specified maintenance must be performed
annually by:
n Siemens engineers, or:
n Third parties contracted by the customer.

 CAUTION
Risk of injury
Perform a risk assessment for accessing the outlet location before inspection.
 Perform a visual inspection for outlets that are located on rooftops or high on
building.

Tab. 35 Quench line maintenance

Function Reason Component checks

Quench line installation n Asphyxiation - Safety of n Check for water in the quench valve.
patient. n Check the drain screw is removed and hole is
n Asphyxiation - Safety of free from debris.
public. n Check quench line isolation.
n Overpressure - Safe n Check quench line insulation and warning
venting of magnet sys‐ tape.
tem.
n Check quench line outlet for obstructions.
n Check outlet rain cover.
n Check protective mesh.
n Check quench line outlet area is restricted.
n Check outlet has a visible warning sign.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 196 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 197

If the quench line fails any maintenance checks:

n Make the necessary corrections.
n Escalate to Magnet HSC if the quench valve or quench line is blocked.
n Escalate to Magnet HSC if the quench line outlet exits in a confined area that is not
restricted.

Safety Information
The quench line is a critical component for the safe operation of the magnet. During a
quench a large volume of helium gas vented. The gas is extremely cold and standing
close to the outlet could cause asphyxiation and extreme cold burns. The quench line out‐
let must always end at a point where access by people is not possible.
It is the responsibility of the operator of the MRI system to ensure that the quench line is
maintained in an operable state.

 DANGER
Risk of asphyxiation
Failure to observe the following may result in the loss of consciousness leading to
death.
 Do not vent helium gas from the quench line outlet into the magnet room.
 Do not vent helium gas from the quench line into an enclosed space or corri‐
dor.
 The quench line outlet must vent to atmosphere in a direction that is not ac‐
cessible to people.
 Vented helium gas must be prevented from entering a building through win‐
dows or air intake units.

 DANGER
Risk of quench line failure
Failure to observe the following warning may result in cold burns, asphyxiation
leading to death.
 Existing quench pipes must comply with these quench line instructions.
 The pressure calculator tool must be used to check that an existing quench
line is acceptable.
 Always perform the annual maintenance checks.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 197 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
198 3 Preparation for installation

 DANGER
Water and ice blockage in Quench line
High internal pressure from a blockage will cause damage to the magnet system
and quench line during a quench.
 Only use the quench line outlet configurations described.
 Check water or snow cannot ingress into the quench line from the outlet.
 Check the drain hole is free from debris.
 Always perform the annual maintenance checks.

 WARNING
Risk of cold burns
Failure to observe the following warning may result in cold burns.
 The quench line outlet location must conform to these instructions.
 A warning sign must be visible next to the outlet.
 Restrict the quench line outlet with an area clearly defined with a fence.

 Customer sites must have the quench line installed and available for immediate use
when the magnet system arrives.

[Link] Design and Escalation Process

There are 4 steps in the design and escalation process:

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 198 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 199

Fig. 136: Quench Line Design Process

Start: Customer (RF installer)

Finish: Siemens PM confirms
provides installation design to
installation design is OK
Siemens PM

Step 1: Calculate the Pressure Drop - complete

the ‘Quench Pipe Acceptance Protocol’

Design is
acceptable Yes

No

Step 2: The local Siemens PM

completes the ‘Escalated
Acceptance checklist’ and submits
additional information

Step 3: Siemens H SR CRM TPL PM Siemens H SR CRM TPL PM

complete evaluation of information advises Siemens PM

Design is
Finish: Siemens PM to advise the Yes
acceptable
customer (RF installer) to provide a new
design

No

Siemens H SR CRM TPL PM escalate

to SMT R&D

Siemens H SR CRM TPL PM

advises Siemens PM Step 4: SMT R&D provide design for
final escalation

SMT R&D advise H SR CRM

Design is SMT R&D advises Siemens
TPL PM that a new design is No Yes
acceptable H SR CRM TPL PM
required

Step 1 - Quench Line Design Process

The project manager or person designated by Siemens must perform the following:
n Install a new quench line that meets the design requirements and pass the pressure
drop calculator.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 199 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
200 3 Preparation for installation

n Check existing Siemens or OEM quench pipes. They must meet the design require‐
ments. Existing quench pipes must pass the pressure drop calculator.
n Complete the ‘Pressure drop calculator’.
n Complete the ‘Acceptance Protocol’. completed and signed off.
n If the design passes the pressure drop, continue with the installation.

 Quench pipes that fail the pressure drop or any of the criteria in the checklist must be
corrected until it passes.

n Escalate to Siemens H SR CRM TPL PM to be assessed when further solutions are re‐
quired.

Step 2 - Escalation for Quench Line Designs

The project manager or person designated by Siemens must provide Siemens H SR CRM
TPL PM the following additional information:
n Completed pressure drop calculation.
n Acceptance checklist.
n Escalated acceptance.
n Outlet and quench line photographs.

Step 3 - Siemens H SR CRM TPL PM Escalated Support

Siemens H SR CRM TPL PM will:
n Determine which level of support is required.
n Obtain a cost code from the regional Siemens organization and agree a time-frame.
n Provide Level 1 and Level 2 support if possible.
n Escalate all design issues to SMT R&D. Ensure that all relevant site information is avail‐
able.

Step 4 - Siemens Magnet Technology Escalated Support

SMT R&D System group will:
n Evaluate the installed quench line and provide a solution.
n Evaluate all ‘multi-system’ quench pipes.
n Complete an appraisal of the existing installation.
n Provide a detailed report with solutions.

Chargeable Costs for Design Support

Resource time is a chargeable cost for escalated quench pipes that:
n Require improved designs to meet the pressure drop calculator.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 200 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 201

n Are a non-standard configuration (multi-systems) and do not comply with the

quench line design instructions.
n Require a site visit.
n Require specialist analysis using CFD (Computation Fluid Dynamics).

[Link] Installation Requirements

Overview of the installation process. The quench line designs must conform with the
safety critical components and process. Safety must not be compromised.
Tab. 36 Specific safety quench line requirements

Planning Planning and installation must be performed by competent and qualified per‐
sonnel, as appointed by the project manager.
New sites The quench line must be available for immediate use before the magnet system
arrives to allow suitable venting for the magnet during installation.
Existing sites Existing quench pipes must be checked and the correct pressure calculator used
to confirm that the quench line is acceptable for the new magnet.
Pressure drop Quench line calculation tools have been provided for calculating pressure drops
calculation and must be used for each installation.
The calculated pressure drop must be less than 100 mbar.
Materials Only the quench line materials, components and sizes in these instructions can
be used.
Outlet The outlet must be external to the building in an area not accessible to people.
Only the outlet design options provided in this manual can be fitted.
Warning tape The quench line must be identified with a warning tape along the complete
and sign length of the quench line.
A warning sign must be fitted next to the outlet or at access points to the vent
area. Warning sign set material number - 04297706.
Maintenance It is the responsibility of the operator of the MRI system to ensure that the
quench line is maintained with annual inspections performed.
Emergency plan The operator of the MRI system must prepare an “Emergency-Plan”. Details for
generating such an “Emergency-Plan” can be taken from the Siemens “Operator
Manual”.

[Link] Design Specifications

The design and construction of the quench line must be documented in drawings, pres‐
sure calculations and photographs.

 n

n
This information must be kept with the "System Owner Manual".
A copy of this information must be sent to H IM MR QM RMPM
n A copy must be sent to MR Q, ( Acceptance Protocols / Page 245)

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 201 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
202 3 Preparation for installation

Tab. 37 Design rules

Item Specifications Link

Quench line mate‐ Only straight, hydraulically smooth bore line section of ( Quench Line Ma‐
rials stainless steel or aluminium must be used in the con‐ terials / Page 203)
struction of the quench line.
Thermal contrac‐ Stainless steel bellows must be fitted at a minimum of ( Thermal Contrac‐
tion every 10 m for thermal contraction of long quench tion / Page 204)
pipes.
Galvanic isolation Fit isolation bush when connecting acoustic de-coupler. ( Galvanic Isola‐
tion / Page 205)
Acoustic de-cou‐ The acoustic de-coupler supplied with the magnet sys‐ ( Acoustic Decou‐
pler tem must be fitted. pler / Page 210)
Horizontal adaptor Options for horizontal quench pipes. ( Horizontal Adap‐
tor / Page 213)
Elbow & Expansion Component options for quench pipes. ( Elbows and Ex‐
diffusers pansion Diffus‐
ers / Page 213)
Joints and seals Welded joints must be made by qualified welders. Bolted ( Joints and
flanges and seals can be used. Seals / Page 216)
RF Feed through Fitting of RF room waveguide. ( RF Feed-through
(Wave‐
guide) / Page 207)
Insulation Options for quench line insulation. The length of the ( Insulation of
quench line including the acoustic de-coupler must be Quench
insulated. Line / Page 217)
Warning tape & Warning tape supplied must be fitted at intervals along ( Warning Tape and
signs the length of the quench line. Signs / Page 218)
A warning sign must be fitted (where appropriate) next
to the outlet.
Water drain Check quench valve drain or fitting alternative drain. ( Water
Drains / Page 220)
Outlet design The outlet of the line must be fitted with a suitable end ( Quench Line Out‐
component to prevent ingress of rain, snow, and foreign let De‐
objects. sign / Page 227)
Outlet location & The outlet must be located in an area that is inaccessible ( Quench Line Out‐
Restricted areas to the general public. Helium gas must not enter win‐ let De‐
dows or air inlets. sign / Page 227)
Deflector plate Fitted directly below a horizontal outlet to deflect gas ( Deflector
flow. Plates / Page 239)

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 202 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 203

Item Specifications Link

Quench line con‐ Horizontal and vertical quench line diagrams of compo‐ ( Quench Line Con‐
figurations nents. figura‐
tion / Page 240)
Quench line sizing Example of quench line layout and size requirements. ( Pressure Drop Cal‐
culator / Page 242)
Calculator tool The maximum internal pressure allowed on the line in ( Pressure Drop Cal‐
the design calculations is 100 mbar. culator / Page 242)
The quench line and components must be designed to
withstand a pressure of 450 mbar.
Acceptance proto‐ Completion of acceptance protocol (including outlet de‐ ( Acceptance Proto‐
col sign and location). cols / Page 245)
Mobile systems Design and installation for mobile systems. ( Mobile Systems
Quench Line De‐
sign / Page 257)

Quench Line Materials

 DANGER
Quench line material failure
Material corrosion or failure of fittings of the quench line can lead to asphyxia‐
tion, cold burns serious injury or death.
 The use of incorrect materials (other than those stated) may lead to a leaks
and rupture of the quench line.
 Incorrect materials and fixings can lead to damage to the building.
 Some Stainless Steel materials have high corrosion properties when welded
or subjected to atmospheric conditions (example 200 AISI Stainless).
 Do not run a quench line directly in the ground unless appropriate insulation
materials are used.

Quench pipes must be made from straight, hydraulically smooth bore line sections.
n Bends up to 90 degrees are acceptable ( Elbows and Expansion Diffusers / Page 213)
n Expansion diffusers can be fitted if necessary.
n All line dimensions specified are outside diameters (OD).
Stainless steel line
n The quench line can be made from non-magnetic stainless steel tube.
- Use only the stainless steel grades AISI 304, 309, 316, and 321 [EN 1.4301, 1.4828,
1.4401, and 1.4878].
n The line wall thickness must be a minimum of 0.7 mm (22 S.W.G).

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 203 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
204 3 Preparation for installation

n Only round section tubing may be used.

 Square section (ventilation ducting) is not allowed.

n Flexible stainless steel line can be used for short quench line installations up to 5 m.
- Flexible line is a good option to use in ‘mobile’ trailers.
- Install flexible line as straight as possible.
- Do not install with tight bends or twists. This puts strain on the quench valve.
n The thermal contraction of stainless steel line is up to 3 mm / meter.
-
Stainless steel bellow sections must be fitted to allow for contraction.
Aluminium line
n The quench line can be made from aluminium.
- Extruded line aluminium grades 6063 and 6082 must be used.
- Use line rolled and welded from aluminium sheet. Grade 5083.
n The line be wall thickness must be a minimum of 2.0 mm(14 S.W.G).
n Only round section tubing may be used. Square section is not allowed.
n Consideration of up to 4.5 mm/meter must be given to the thermal contraction of alu‐
minium.
- Stainless steel bellow sections must be fitted to allow for thermal contraction.

Thermal Contraction

 WARNING
Thermal contraction of quench line
Thermal contraction during a quench can rupture the line as well as damage to
anchored points.
 Always fit flexible bellows sections as required.
 Flexible bellows must be made of stainless steel.
 Escalate if unsure of the requirements.

n Stainless steel bellows must be fitted at a minimum of every 10 meters. This provides
a flexible solution to the thermal contraction.
n The bellows movement must be limited to stop line expansion under internal pres‐
sure.
n The total length of the bellow sections must not exceed 2% of the allowed maximum
line length.
- It is not necessary to include the length of bellows in the pressure calculator.
n If no bellow sections are fitted the quench line must not be fixed where it passes
through internal walls or exits from the building.
- Only fixed point is through the RF room, ( Fig. 139 Page 209)

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 204 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 205

n The quench line must not pass through holes cut in glass windows.
-
Windows must be replaced with a suitable material.
Quench line weight
n The weight of the quench line must be supported by brackets above the magnet.

 The magnet must not carry any load from the vertical quench line weight.

n The quench line must not be stressed due to thermal contraction. The bracket sup‐
ports must allow for movement.

 CAUTION
Damage to system
Damage to magnet components or turret leaks can occur if the quench line is not
supported.
 The magnet must not carry any load from the vertical quench line weight.
 The line must be supported by suitable brackets and clamps along it total
length.
 In earthquake regions suitable seismic anchor bolts.

Galvanic Isolation
n Galvanic isolation is required to avoid electrical noise being picked up by loops be‐
tween:
- The magnet and quench line.
- The RF room and building.
n Galvanic isolation bushes (delivered with the system) must be fitted between the
acoustic decoupler and magnet elbow.
n Galvanic isolation is also required for the RF feed-through at the the RF room wall,
( RF Feed-through (Waveguide) / Page 207)

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 205 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
206 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 137: Isolation bush fitted n Fit all isolation bushes into the
flange when connecting the acous‐
tic decoupler to the magnet elbow
or horizontal coupling.
n Fit the acoustic decoupler using the
seal, stainless steel M12 screw and
Nord-Lock washer supplied.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 206 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 207

Fig. 138: Galvanic joint at magnet end

Acoustic De-coupler Galvanic Separation

1
2

6 5

(1) Acoustic de-coupler flange

(2) M8 Hex head screws (12 off)
(3) Fibre gasket
(4) PTFE Insulator (12 off)
(5) Nordlock Washer (12 off)
(6) Turret Flange

RF Feed-through (Waveguide)
The RF feed-through must conform to certain geometric constraints to guarantee the RF
integrity of the RF room. ( Fig. 139 Page 209)
As a function of the inner line diameter (D) the minimum line length Lmin for frequencies
up to 128 MHz and 110-dB attenuation is:
Lmin = 4.0 x D
whereby: D ≤ 300 mm

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 207 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
208 3 Preparation for installation

To ensure RF room shielding:

n The bolt spacing between the connector panel to RF room must be a maximum of 30
mm apart.
n RF seals may be required between the mounting flange and the RF room.
n All component materials for the RF Waveguide must be provide from a local source.
n A ‘floating flange’ can be used at 1 or both ends to improve alignment and installa‐
tion.

 A ‘Floating flange’ can also be used on longer sections of line if bolted flanges are used.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 208 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 209

Fig. 139: RF Waveguide

Connection
Floating plate to the
flanges both
ends
RF room
A
D

As required

Lmin = 4 x D

Insulating connections are to be made

at both ends of the waveguide

Ø to suit

30 mm max.

View on arrow A

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 209 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
210 3 Preparation for installation

Acoustic Decoupler

 CAUTION
Isolation and noise transmission
The acoustic de-coupler must be fitted to ensure isolation and noise reduction
from the quench line.
 Always fit the acoustic de-coupler between quench valve and quench line.
 Always fit the galvanic isolation bushes.
 Do not bend the acoustic de-coupler greater than +/-20 mm.

 DANGER
Risk of asphyxiation
Failure to observe the following may result in the loss of consciousness leading to
death.
 Do not vent helium gas from the quench line outlet into the magnet room.
 Fit the acoustic decoupler using the fittings and instructions provided.

The acoustic de-coupler is supplied in site box with the system.

n Fit the acoustic de-coupler and gasket seals between the quench valve and quench
line.
n The main functions of the acoustic de-coupler are:
- To reduce noise transmission.
- To provide a small amount of flexibility of +/-20 mm.
n There are 2 specific acoustic de-coupler sizes:
- 1.5 Tesla requires 102 mm (4”) clear bore size.
- 3.0 Tesla requires 152 mm (6”) clear bore size.

The acoustic de-coupler must be installed nominally straight to allow for minor misalign‐

 ment.
Typically ± 5 mm. Do not exceed the design limit of ± 20 mm.

n The length of the acoustic de-coupler is included in the quench line Calculation tool.
n The connection to the de-coupler will require a suitable machined flange. Dimensions
for the 150 mm and 200 mm flange connections are provided for the 1.5 T and 3.0 T
de-couplers.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 210 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 211

Fig. 140: Acoustic De-coupler for 1.5 Tesla magnets

Fixed Flange End

12 off M8
on 130 dia

103 dia
372

Floating Flange End

12 off M8
on 130 dia

97 dia

150

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 211 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
212 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 141: Acoustic De-coupler for 3.0 Tesla Magnets

Acoustic De-coupler for 3.0 Tesla Magnets

Fixed Flange End

12 off M8
on 180 pcd
150 dia
372

Fixed Flange End

12 off M8
on 180 pcd

150 dia

200

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 212 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 213

Horizontal Adaptor
Horizontal adaptor kits are available from SPC for all 4 K magnet systems.
n These adaptors are a commonly fitted on mobile systems.

Tab. 38 Horizontal adaptors

System Type Material number

Avanto / Espree 03861452
Aera / Skyra / Spectra / Prisma 10129706

Fig. 142: Horizontal Adaptor and Acoustic Decoupler

(1) Horizontal Adaptor

(2) Acoustic De-coupler

Elbows and Expansion Diffusers

n All elbows in the line must be smooth walled. The internal line radius to diameter ratio
range is 1.5 to 5.0, ( Fig. 143 Page 215)
n A fabricated bend using straight sections is permissible .
- The maximum sections used must not exceed 4.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 213 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
214 3 Preparation for installation

n Mitred elbows may be used in short quench pipes.

- Mitred elbows create a higher pressure loss and must be avoided on very long
quench pipes.
- Keep the number of mitred elbows to a minimum if used.
n Expansion from a small to a large line diameter must be accomplished using a diffus‐
er. Diffusers must conform to the geometric parameters shown in
( Fig. 146 Page 216).

 CAUTION
Magnet over pressure
Shockwave reflections and local pressure peaks could damage the magnet.
 Never reduce the diameter of a line in the downstream direction.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 214 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 215

Fig. 143: Smooth elbow Fig. 144: Segmented elbow

Recommended 1 piece elbow Minimum 4 section elbow

D
D

R/D > 1.5 < 5 R/D > 1.5 < 5

Fig. 145: Mitred elbow

D

Mitred Elbow
D

Very high pressure loss

 Avoid using 90 degree mitred elbows if possible. High pressures will be created in long
quench pipes installations.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 215 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
216 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 146: Diffuser

Flow direction

D1

D2
B
To reduce pressure drop
B > 2.5 x (D2 - D1)

Joints and Seals

n The sections of line and elbows must only be:
- Welded together.
- Bolted together.
n Welding line sections must be performed by competent, certified welders.
n Bolted flanges is an option for short quench line lengths. The correct material for gas‐
ket seals must be used.
n A ‘floating’ flange for bolted sections can be used to help the installation process,
( Fig. 139 Page 209)
n The correct material for gasket seals must be used:
- UHMW-PE -(Cestilene HD1000).
- PTFE - (BS EN 13000-1:1998, BS EN 13000-2:1998).
- Fibre - (ASTM F36, BS 7531, DIN 3754P).
- Hostalen GC579, or Hostalen GUR812.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 216 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 217

 No other materials are permitted for the seals.

Insulation of Quench Line

 CAUTION
Oxygen enrichment
Insulating the quench line will reduce liquid air dripping and oxygen enrichment
in the room during a quench.
 Always fit insulation along the line from the quench valve to the outlet.
 Do not smoke in an oxygen enriched atmosphere.
 Risk of damage to electrical equipment.
 Risk of cold burns.

Insulation will reduce water condensation and liquid air dripping on internal surfaces and
electrical wiring. ( Fig. 147 Page 218)
n To avoid oxygen enrichment and condensation of liquid air:
- Thermally insulate along its full length of the quench line inside the building.
- A double-walled structure is allowed.
- Mineral fiber insulation (brands such as Rockwool Ductwrap or other) must not be
less than 25 mm thick.
- The insulation must conform to local regulations for fibrous insulation materials.
n Within the RF room the whole length of the line must be insulated:
- With 1 layer of mineral fiber insulation 25 mm thick with vapour barrier.
- Covered with 1 layer of 25 mm thick Class O Armaflex, ([Armacell).
- The outside may be covered with an aesthetic finish.

 There must be clearance between the finished insulation and the magnet covers.

n To avoid RF disturbance the insulation must not make electrical contact with the
waveguide.
n External pipes must be insulated if access cannot be restricted at the outlet.
- External insulation must be weatherproof, [e.g., Armafinish FR paint, or Arma-Chek
insulation].

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 217 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
218 3 Preparation for installation

Warning Tape and Signs

Fig. 147: Quench line warning tape The fully insulated quench line must be
marked along its length with the warn‐
1 ing tape supplied.
 Material number 03866493.

(1) Warning tape

(2) Insulation

The quench line manufacturer must provide and install suitable fittings to secure a warn‐
ing sign.
n A warning sign must be securely attached near to the external horizontal or vertical
outlet.
n It must be placed in a suitable position to be visible by the public or maintenance
workers.
n It must be visible at eye level directly below outlets located >5 m high on a building.
n Outlets >5 m must have a sign next to it. This is a warning to maintenance personal
(for example window cleaners).
n A warning sign must be located near a vertical outlet located on a flat roof with access
for maintenance.

Fig. 148: Outlet warning sign n The outlet warning sign shown is an
example of the Multi language signs
available.
n There are 8 different signs covering
33 languages.
n The warning signs are also available
as a spare part from CSML.
n Warning sign set Material number -
04297706.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 218 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 219

Fig. 149: Example of local sourced sign If the native country language is not
available on the supplied warning sign:
Source a outlet sign locally.
n The sign must include a Caution
symbol and words in the local lan‐
guage.
n The words should be:
n ‘Keep away. Extremely cold gas
may be exhausted with no warn‐
ing. Danger of cold burns and as‐
phyxiation’.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 219 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
220 3 Preparation for installation

Water Drains

 DANGER
Water and ice blockage in Quench valve
High internal pressure will cause damage to the magnet system and quench line
during a quench.
Risk of asphyxiation, cold burns and death from a ruptured quench line.
 The quench valve drain screw must be removed. (Unless high altitude vent
kits are fitted).
 Check the drain hole is free from debris.
 Check water or snow cannot ingress into the quench line from the outlet.
 Always perform the annual maintenance checks.

 WARNING
Corrosion of quench valve materials
Water sitting in the quench valve will corrode the spring mechanism causing air
ingress and icing to the magnet.
 Always perform the annual maintenance checks.
 Check that the quench valve drain screw is removed. (Unless high altitude
vent kits are fitted).
 Check the drain hole is free from debris.

 The drain screw must remain fitted to Mobile systems fitted with a high altitude kit.

Water may collect in the quench valve or at the lowest point of the quench line. This is a
result of improper quench line insulation (condensation), or incorrect rain protection at
the quench line outlet.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 220 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 221

Fig. 150: Drain screw location A drain hole can be found at the bottom
of all 4 K quench valves.
n Check that the drain screw has been
removed.
n Check that the hole orientation is lo‐
cated at the bottom of the quench
valve body.

Fig. 151: Drain hole inspection The drain hole can be difficult to see on
installed systems.
n Feel at the bottom of the quench
valve with a hand. The drain screw
will be identified if still fitted.
n If necessary use a inspection mirror
(non -magnetic) to check visibly for
the drain hole.
n Remove if found fitted.

 Mobile systems fitted with a high altitude kit will require the drain screw to be fitted.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 221 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
222 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 152: 10K System OR64 (example) To check for water in the OR64 quench
valve or other 10 K legacy systems:
n Remove the bottom NW25 seal and
blank from the quench valve.
n If fitted with a vent line disconnect
the NW25 clamp and seal.

(1) NW25 blanked port

n Sections in the quench line where water might collect must be avoided. If they can‐
not, a water drain must be fitted. See ( Fig. 153 Page 222) for dimensions and the
method of fitting to the quench line.
n During a quench there is a small release of helium gas from the drain holes. The leak
rate from a 1.0 mm drain hole is 10 liters in 10 min. This is an acceptable volume of
gas into small rooms.
n It is not a requirement to connect the drains to a wastewater installation.
n The drain hole must be inspected as an annual ‘Maintenance’ check. Check that it is
clear of debris and not blocked.
- Inspection can be performed with the magnet at field.
Fig. 153: Drawing of automatic water drain

13 A/F Hex
20.00

M8
6Ø

Drill 3 mm Ø

Drill 1mm Ø

6.00 6.00 16.00

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 222 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 223

Fig. 154: Water Drain Installation

M8

10 dia Weld all round

Insulation Insulation

Drain fitting for stainless steel line:

n To enable fitting of the automatic water drain, (08396439):
 Drill a 10 mm diameter hole through the line.
 Weld a 8 mm Stainless steel nut to surface of line.
 Screw in water drain.
 When insulating the line, leave 20 mm diameter clearance for drain.
Drain fitting for aluminium line:
n To enable fitting of the automatic water drain, (08396439):
 Drill a 10 mm diameter hole through the line.
 Weld a 25 mm diameter x 12 mm aluminium spigot to the aluminium line.
 Drill and tap the spigot for a 8 mm thread.
 Screw in water drain.
 When insulating the line, leave 20 mm diameter clearance for drain.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 223 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
224 3 Preparation for installation

Lightning Conductor
The ‘Site Planning Guide’ requires a magnet system to be installed into a building in ac‐
cordance with the local building regulations.
n The stainless steel outer magnet vessel is electrically conductive. Any current from a
lightning strike will travel to ground.
n The patient is protected by the structure of the magnet and insulated from its metal
surface.
n The magnet outer stainless steel vessel must be grounded in accordance with the in‐
stallation requirements for the RF room.
n The super-conducting magnet coils will not be damaged.
n Safety circuits may be triggered:
- The magnet may quench.
- Magnet supervisory and sensitive electronics may be damaged.

Pressure Test

 CAUTION
Low pressure test
Leaks from welds and joints in the quench line must be identified and corrected.
 Pressure test on completion of the installation.
 Visually inspect the quench line during annual maintenance.
 Visually check for helium leaks to the quench line during a helium fill (or 10 m
after a quench).

When the quench line is fully installed a pressure test must be performed. This is to check
that there are no large gas leaks from the joints and seals along the length of the line.
n The pressure test must remain stable for a suitable length of time.
n Check welds, seals and joints if the pressure drops.
n Helium gas seen leaking from joints during a helium fill or quench must be repaired or
reported for further investigation.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 224 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 225

[Link] Multi-system Quench Lines

 WARNING
Quench line overpressure
Simultaneous magnet quenching can cause high pressures and component dam‐
age.
 Escalate multi-system requirements to H SR CRM TPL PM and SMT for evalua‐
tion.
 Do not ramp 2 magnets at the same time.
 Only perform maintenance procedures on 1 magnet at a time.

NOTICE
Incorrect quench line design
Multi-system quench pipes require additional pressure calculations. This is cur‐
rently not available as a online tool.
 A multi-system installation must be escalated to H SR CRM TPL PM and SMT.
 The information requested on the ‘quench calculator and Acceptance proto‐
col’ must be provided.

 CAUTION
Simultaneous magnet quenches
Overpressure and damage to the quench line and magnet.
 Escalate and report all incidents of simultaneous quenches into a multi sys‐
tem quench line.
 Siemens cannot take responsibility for the safe operation of a OEM system
connected to the same quench line.
 Inspection by magnet HSC may be required.

Additional design rules:

n Multi system quench pipes must comply with all design standards.
n The pressure drop calculator must not exceed the 100 mbar pressure limit. This in‐
cludes all the magnets attached.
n It is acceptable to have a mix of 1.5T and 3.0T magnets.
n The quench line must be designed to contain a simultaneous quench without exceed‐
ing design pressures.
- Quench line materials and wall thickness must withstand the pressure of 0.45 bar.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 225 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
226 3 Preparation for installation

n System maintenance must be planned. 2 magnets cannot be serviced at the same

time. For example:
- Ramping 1 magnet when filling at field on another magnet.
- Ramping or filling 1 magnet when replacing a quench valve bursting disk on anoth‐
er magnet.
n Do not ramp a magnet if another magnet has a low operating pressure.
- Confirm other magnets have no leak into the quench line from open valves or a
broken bursting disk.
n The estimated pressure must not exceed 0.45 bar in a case of simultaneous quench.
n Connections from each magnet must be angled into the quench line at 45 degrees for
efficient gas flow.
n Simultaneous quenches must be reported to magnet HSC.
n The quench line and magnets will need inspecting after a simultaneous quench.

Fig. 155: Multi system connections n Connections from each magnet

must be angled into the quench line
for effective gas flow.
1

(1) Welded segment connection

(2) Welded 45 degree connection

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 226 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 227

Fig. 156: Multi system quench line(example)

[Link] Quench Line Outlet Design

The end of the quench line requires a vent outlet suitable for the location. The outlet vent
is required to direct the helium gas away from any public space or building.

 DANGER
Risk of asphyxiation
Failure to observe the following may result in dizziness, loss of consciousness or
death.
 Do not vent helium gas from the quench line outlet into the magnet room.
 Do not vent helium gas from the quench line into an enclosed space or corri‐
dor.
 The quench line outlet must vent to atmosphere in a direction that is not ac‐
cessible to people.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 227 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
228 3 Preparation for installation

 DANGER
Water and ice blockage in Quench line
High internal pressure from a blockage will cause damage to the magnet system
and quench line during a quench.
 Only use the quench line outlet configurations described.
 Check water or snow cannot ingress into the quench line from the outlet.
 Always perform the annual maintenance checks.

 CAUTION
Safety
If the quench line is not configured correctly, safety is compromised.
 It is important that all outlet designs are > 2.5 x line area and have a mesh
fitted.
 It is important that the quench line outlet is accessible and/or visible for main‐
tenance.

Outlet Mesh Protection

The quench line outlet must be protected from:
n Weather conditions such as rain or snow with a rain guard.
n Ingress of foreign bodies such as birds, rodents or insects.
n The outlet shape can be annular, circular or rectangular.
- A stainless steel wire mesh must be fitted to all outlets.
- A rain guard must be fitted to vertical outlets.
n Use a mesh size of 10 + 2 / -1 mm with 1.0 ± 0.3 mm round wires.
n The area of the mesh must be > 2.5 times the cross-section area of the quench line.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 228 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 229

Fig. 157: Correct outlet and mesh size Outlet example showing:
n Mesh area size > 2.5 of quench line.
n Mesh size 10 +2 / -1 mm.

n The outlet must be visually inspected for damage or a blockage annually as a safety
check.

 CAUTION
Risk of injury
Perform a risk assessment of accessing the outlet location before inspection.
 Perform a visual inspection for outlets that are located on rooftops or high on
building.

Vertical Outlet Design

 DANGER
Risk of Asphyxiation and cold burns
Helium gas will exit a vertical outlet with considerable force creating a large cloud
burst covering a wide area.
 Access 360 degrees around the outlet must be restricted.
 Visible warning signs must be fixed near to the outlet.
 Check that the area around the outlet has not changed. New buildings or
structures that contravene the safe distance around the outlet.
 The quench line manufacturer must provide and install suitable fittings to se‐
cure a warning sign.

Where the quench line exits vertically through a flat roof:

n The outlet must be at a height to prevent water from entering:
- In the event of blocked roof drains.
- Drifting snow.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 229 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
230 3 Preparation for installation

n A rain shield must be fitted over the line outlet.

n Mesh of the specified size must be fitted between the quench line and rain shield.
n A deflector plate must be welded to the line where it exits the roof. This prevent dam‐
age to the roof material and stop helium from re-entering the building.
- A deflector plate is required regardless of the length of line above the roof.
- The deflector plate must be no less than the diameter as the rain guard.
n The deflector plate must be located:
- No less than 2 x line diameter above the roof.
- No less than 2 x diameter below the bottom of the rain guard.
Fig. 158: Vertical outlet

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 230 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 231

Fig. 159: Vertical outlet (example)

Vertical Outlet Area Restrictions

The gas released from the vertical outlet dimensions provided requires a safe area of X
(m).
n This area on a roof must be clearly identified and fenced where possible.
n Warning signs must be displayed near the outlet on rooftops that are accessed for
maintenance.
n For details see ( Fig. 160 Page 232) and the table of distances.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 231 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
232 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 160: Vertical outlet - Helium gas danger area

Fig. 161: Vertical outlets - plan view

Tab. 39 Fenced area requirement

Outlet option 1.5 T System 3.0 T System

X - (Meters) Y (Meters) X - (Meters) Y (Meters)
Vertical 20 N/A 25 N/A

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 232 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 233

Horizontal Outlet Designs

 DANGER
Risk of Asphyxiation and cold burns
Helium gas will exit a horizontal outlet initially with force in the form of a jet.
There is a risk of injury or Death from asphyxiation.
 Access directly below or in front of the outlet must be restricted. Visible warn‐
ing signs must be fixed near to the outlet.
 The quench line manufacturer must provide and install suitable fittings to se‐
cure a warning sign.
 A large cloud of gas (up to 15 m) away from the outlet will form and disperse
to atmosphere.
 In narrow streets the jet of gas must be deflected upwards using the deflector
plate or angled rain hood options.
 Windows within the restricted access area must be sealed or permanently
closed.

n Horizontal outlets can be used when the quench line exits through a side wall of a
building.
n The horizontal outlet must conform to 1 of the 4 options or must be fitted with the
‘Angled Rain Hood’ option.
n The exit must be situated where it cannot be blocked by drifting snow.
n The horizontal outlet must not be situated where:
- Helium gas cannot be drawn into an air inlet.
- Helium gas cannot enter open windows.
- Helium gas cannot not blow directly onto a structure or equipment.
- Helium gas must not blow directly onto a window or air intake on a opposite build‐
ing.
n Restrict access to windows or doors. This reduces the risk of injury from cold burns
and asphyxiation:
- By 3 m each side and below.
- By 6 m vertically above the outlet.
- By 5 m above ground level (sidewalks, roads).
- A clear warning sign must be put fixed next to the outlet.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 233 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
234 3 Preparation for installation

NOTICE
Quench line exit from building
Do not exit the line through a glass window pane or panel.
 Replace the window with a suitable material that will not crack or break when
in contact with extreme temperatures.

Fig. 162: Outlet distances to windows and doors

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 234 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 235

Fig. 163: Quench line outlet to atmosphere - Horizontal option 1

Fig. 164: Quench line outlet to atmosphere - Horizontal option 2

45.0°
D

Cone Angle Mesh Area >

> 10 deg 2.5 x Tube Area

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 235 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
236 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 165: Quench line outlet to atmosphere - Horizontal option 3

Round or square outlet

2D

D
Mesh Area D
2.5 x Tube Area

Fig. 166: Quench line outlet to atmosphere - Horizontal option 4

Rectangle Outlet Round Outlet

Mesh Area Mesh Area
D

2.5 x Tube Area 2.5 x Tube Area

D
2D

2D

1.5D

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 236 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 237

Horizontal Outlet Area Restrictions

Fig. 167: Fenced public area n Where gas flow from a horizontal
outlet exits across or over:
n A walkway
n A road.
n Accessed by people.
n Restrict an area directly below the
outlet by erecting a fence.

Fig. 168: Outlet 1 - 3 Gas Restricted area Fig. 169: Outlet 2 - Gas restricted area

Fig. 170: Outlet 4 - Gas restricted area The dimensions of the fenced area will
depend on the type of magnet and out‐
let. See table below for details.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 237 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
238 3 Preparation for installation

Tab. 40 Fenced area requirements

Outlet option 1.5 T System 3.0 T System

X - (Meters) Y (Meters) X - (Meters) Y (Meters)
Horizontal Option 4 4 5 5
Horizontal Option 2 10 3 13 3
Horizontal Option 3 4 4 5 5
Horizontal Option 4 12 3 15 3

Fig. 171: Horizontal outlet area

Louvre Outlet Panel

For aesthetics a louvered panel can be fitted over the outlet when horizontal option 4 is
used.
n The outlet location must conform to the ‘ quench line outlet design’, ( Quench Line
Outlet Design / Page 227)
n A wire mesh (Mesh size 10 +2 / -1 mm) must still be fitted behind the louvre panel
n The louvre panel must be securely fixed to the building.
n The louvre panel must not compromise the gas flow.
n The total area ‘to atmosphere’ between the louvre panels must be at least 2.5 times
the line diameter.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 238 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 239

Fig. 172: Louvre panel (example) n The angle of the louvre panels must
not exceed 30 degrees.
- Overlapping of the panels will re‐
duce rain or snow ingress.

 Louvered panels are always used to cover the outlet on Mobile trailers.

[Link] Deflector Plates

A deflector plate can be fitted below outlets that blow gas in a downward direction. This
allows the gas flow to be deflected upwards.
n From the deflector plate a large gas plume will be produced. This is not ideal:
- In a narrow street.
- Windows directly above.

 For the full design instructions for a deflector plate see, ( Deflector Plate De‐
sign / Page 248)

n The deflector plate is compatible with the outlet designs:

- Horizontal option 1.
-
Horizontal option 3.
When to fit a deflector plate:
n Where the outlet cannot be relocated to comply with the quench line Installation In‐
structions.
n Outlets which are directed downwards into public areas.
n Outlets which are directed into walkways or roads.
n Outlets which are directed at equipment (for example, air conditioning systems).
n Outlets which are directed towards windows or doors.
The deflector plate and supporting frame can be easily made and bolted directly to the
building structure. It must be made to a suitable size and strength to deflect the gas flow
that exits the outlet.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 239 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
240 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 173: Quench with deflector plate

(1) Deflector plate position

[Link] Quench Line Configuration

The installation of a quench line from the magnet must contain:
n Vertical installation will require the elbow supplied with the system.
n Horizontal installations will require a horizontal adaptor or flange to fit to the magnet
quench valve.
n Acoustic decoupler.
n Galvanic separation.
n RF feed through.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 240 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 241

Fig. 174: Example of vertical bellows and cabin feed through

1
4

6
5

1
8

(1) Galvanic separation (2 places)

(2) RF feed through
(3) RF room
(4) Connection to RF room
(5) Diffuser (optional)

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 241 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
242 3 Preparation for installation

(6) Flange (e.g. welded, screw connection)

(7) Acoustic De-coupler
(8) 90° Elbow

[Link] Pressure Drop Calculator

 Select the correct pressure drop calculator tool (1.5 T or 3.0 T) for the magnet sys‐
tem.

The sizing procedure for the quench line must be completed using the “Pressure Drop
Calculator Tool”. This is available from CB-DOC at Siemens Medical Solutions Customer
Service website.
n The total pressure drop for the quench line example has been calculated using the 1.5
Tesla calculator tool.

 The quench valve and acoustic decoupler are already accounted for in the calcula‐
tor.

n A segmented elbow is included to provide a worst case:

n The R/D is 1.5 and the segmented elbow has 4 segments.
n The diffuser has a length greater than 2.5 x the difference between the small and
large bore diameters.
n For this calculation the expansion diffuser is a straight smooth line.
n For all examples: D = inside diameter.
n A horizontal outlet configuration was chosen. ( Fig. 165 Page 236).
n The mesh area is 454 cm2. This is 2.5 x greater than the cross sectional area of the
line (181 cm2).

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 242 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 243

Fig. 175: Example of a quench line 1.5 Tesla magnet

2m Example of Quench Line Layout

6” Smooth
Elbow
3m

4” Smooth
3.5 m 1m Elbow

Acoustic
Decoupler
6” Segmented
Elbow Diffuser Quench Valve
Waveguide

RF Cabin

n Enter the length and diameter for each of the quench line sections.
n If the diameter is not available in the pull-down menu (e.g. for metric lines), then:
- Enter the size into the cell on the right (Diameter in mm).
- Leave zero length for elbows. The effective length is calculated automatically.
n Add all line length’s and elbows into the Calculation tool.
n The total calculated pressure drop must not exceed 100 mbar = 0.1 bar. If OK the
Green - PASSED will be displayed.
This example configuration gives a total pressure drop of 98.1 mbar which is within
specification.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 243 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
244 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 176: 1.5T Calculator tool - Example

n This example shows Green passed at the top of the page. This is an acceptable de‐
sign.
n If the pressure exceeds 100 mbar (Red - Failed displayed), the line is too restrictive.
This is due to:
- The line diameter is too small.
- Wrong elbow type. (Use smooth elbows).
- Excessive amount of elbows used in the construction.
- The quench line is too long with no expansion allowed for along its length.

 For 1.0-Tesla magnets, Harmony (OR24), Impact, (OR42) use the current 1.5T calcu‐
lator tool.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 244 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 245

Quench line Calculator - Siemens 3-T Magnets

Fig. 177: 3.0 T Calculator - screenshot

[Link] Acceptance Protocols

The quench line installation must meet and comply with the acceptance protocols. The
additional quench line installation information must be supplied on completion with the:
n Start-up report.
n Safety related test report.
n Photographs and sketch of the magnet room.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 245 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
246 3 Preparation for installation

 WARNING
Unauthorized design and materials
The quench line installation is the responsibility of the Project Manager to check
and sign off before handing over to the customer.
 The PM must ensure that the quench line installation meets the specified de‐
sign requirements.
 The PM must ensure that the quench line passes the pressure drop calculator.

A copy of the acceptance report must sent back to the responsible Headquarter Q-depart‐
ment:
n Healthcare IM MR QP Installations ( , [Link]@[Link])
The report must provide copies of the pages from the ‘Quench line calculator’, to include:
n A print of the “Pressure drop calculator” page.
n A print of the completed “Acceptance protocol” (including the check list) page.
n Photographs of the quench line outlet showing rain cover and mesh.
n Photographs must provide several views showing the position and perspective of the
outlet location.
n Photographs showing connection to magnet acoustic decoupler and quench valve.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 246 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 247

Fig. 178: Quench Line Acceptance Protocol

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 247 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
248 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 179: Acceptance Protocol Sign off

3.9.2 Deflector Plate Design

[Link] Deflector Plate Overview

This procedure describes the reasons and instances when a deflector plate can be fitted.
The technical design and details for manufacturing a deflector plate are provided.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 248 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 249

Fig. 180: Deflector plate (example) A deflector plate can be fitted beneath a
new or existing quench line outlet that
vents gas downwards.
1
The plate is required to deflect the gas
4 vertically away from public areas, and
equipment.
2

(1) Rain hood

(2) Mesh
(3) Deflector plate assembly
(4) Quench line outlet

The procedure provides instructions for:

n Location requirements for the deflector plate.
n Compatible quench line outlet and deflector plate design.
n Materials and manufacturing details.
n Fitting details.

 Only qualified and competent personnel, as appointed by the project manager can install
quench pipes.

[Link] Safety
n Helium gas exits the vent as a pressurized jet. There is a severe risk of cold burns and
asphyxiation from the helium gas exiting at high velocity from the outlet.
n There is risk of damage to equipment in the path of the vented helium gas.
n There is a significant force (in the order of 1000 N) from the jet onto the plate. The
plate must be securely fastened to the wall with fasteners providing a sufficient factor
of safety.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 249 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
250 3 Preparation for installation

 DANGER
Risk of asphyxiation
Failure to observe the following may result in the loss of consciousness leading to
death.
 Do not vent helium gas from the quench line outlet into the magnet room.
 Do not vent helium gas from the quench line into an enclosed space or corri‐
dor.
 The quench line outlet must vent to atmosphere in a direction that is not ac‐
cessible to people.
 Vented helium gas must be prevented from entering a building through win‐
dows or air intake units.

 DANGER
Risk of quench line failure
Failure to observe the following warning may result in cold burns, asphyxiation
leading to death.
 Existing quench pipes must comply with these quench line instructions.
 The pressure calculator tool must be used to confirm that the existing quench
line is acceptable.
 Ensure that the quench line inspections are performed each year.

 WARNING
Risk of cold burns
Failure to observe the following warning may result in cold burns.
 The quench line outlet location must conform to these instructions.
 Warning labels must be visible next to the outlet.
 Restrict the quench line outlet with an area clearly defined with a fence.

[Link] Design Requirements

n The deflector plate fits beneath the quench line outlet to protect personnel and / or
equipment directly beneath the vent.
n The deflector must be a sufficient distance from the outlet. The space will allow the
gas to flow out from the outlet vent.
n The quench line outlet must comply with the ‘Siemens Site Planning Guide’.
n The deflector plate is compatible with the outlets “Horizontal Option 1” and “Hori‐
zontal Option 3” from the ’Quench line Design’ Instructions.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 250 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 251

Fig. 181: Quench line outlet to atmosphere - Horizontal option 1

Fig. 182: Quench line outlet to atmosphere - Horizontal option 3

Round or square outlet

2D

D
D

Mesh Area
2.5 x Tube Area

n A large volume of gas deflected upwards forms a vertical plume. There is a risk of heli‐
um gas entering windows.
n All windows and air inlets within a vertical distance of ~ 5 m and horizontally ~ 3 m
above the vent must be sealed.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 251 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
252 3 Preparation for installation

n Warning labels must be fitted underneath the deflector plate and / or next to the out‐
let.
Fig. 183: Quench with deflector plate

(1) Deflector plate position

[Link] Deflector Plate Size and Positioning

Fig. 184: Deflector plate size The requirements for the size and posi‐
tioning of the deflector plate are:
Width
n Shielding plate must have a mini‐
1.5 x D 1.5 x D
mum width of 3 x D, where D is the
diameter of quench line outlet.
n The length of the shielding plate
may vary but there must be a mini‐
1.5 x D

mum 1.5 x D distance between the

midpoint of quench line outlet and
Length

shielding plate edge, (furthest paral‐

lel to the wall).
Deflector
plate

Quench tube

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 252 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 253

Fig. 185: Deflector plate and rain hood n The plate must be positioned exactly
Length
1.5 x D below the quench line out‐
let.
n If quench line outlet has an external
Rain cover cover, there must a clearance be‐
tween it and the shielding plate of
at least 1 x D.
1.5 x D

1.0 x D

Deflector plate

1.5 x D 1.5 x D

[Link] Deflector Plate Design

n The deflector plate design consists of:
- A frame made from stainless steel equal angle bars welded together.
- A deflector plate made of stainless steel or aluminium plate. The plate must be held
in the frame with a method that allows for thermal contraction during the quench.
n The following design is for a 1200 mm x 1200 mm deflector plate.
- If a larger plate is required a design should be sent through the quench line escala‐
tion process for approval.
- If a smaller plate is required the frame dimensions can be reduced by scaling down.
The same thickness of plate and section sizes must be used.
- Escalate other configuration of plate and / or frame design for approval.

[Link] Deflector Plate Materials

n The plate must be made from either stainless steel 304 or aluminium 5083.
n The square or rectangular deflector plate should be sized to suit the frame with mini‐
mal clearance around the edges, < 5 mm.
n The gas will spread at an angle of approximately 20 degrees. The deflector plate must
be large enough to deflect the whole of the jet.
n The thickness of the deflector plate depends on the material chosen.
- Stainless steel plate - 5 mm thick.
- Aluminium plate - 12 mm thick.

 Do not use any other materials for manufacturing the deflector plate.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 253 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
254 3 Preparation for installation

[Link] Support Frame Design

n The frame is to be fabricated from equal angle bar of the following size sections:
- 50 x 50 x 5 mm (2” x 2” 1/4 5 imperial).

Fig. 186: Frame design (1) The frame (1) supports the deflector
plate and transmits the load into the
wall using a pair of side struts.
The frame is designed with the side
struts in tension and the fixing points
above the plate.

Fig. 187: Frame design (2) An alternative design (2) may be used if
necessary. For design (2) the support
structure is below the deflector plate.

n In both designs the deflector plate must rest within the angle section. It must not be
“upside-down”, resting on top of the plate retention bolts.

 The orientation of the angle sections containing the plate must be inverted.

n The side struts are angled at 30 degrees to the horizontal. The angle must not be re‐
duced, even if the plate size is reduced.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 254 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 255

[Link] Welds and Joints

n The frame is welded together using one of the following processes:
n Gas Metal Arc welding – GMAW / MIG / MAG
n Gas Tungsten Arc welding – GTAW / TIG
n Shielded Metal Arc welding – SMAW / MMAW / “Stick welding”
n Fillet welds must have a minimum leg size of 4 mm.
n Butt welds must have a minimum penetration of 4 mm.

[Link] Safety Load Test

n The deflector plate structure must be load tested after installation. Test to 3 x design
load (3 x 100 kg) or according to local building regulations.
n Distributed the load evenly across the deflector plate.

Fig. 188: Welded mitre joint n The square frame supporting the de‐
flector plate should be formed using
mitre joints.
n Grind flush if necessary to ensure a
flat surface where the deflector
plate rests.

Fig. 189: Weld positions (typical) n The joints should be welded in the
indicated positions.
n Weld the side struts to the frame at
both ends in the positions indicated.
n Do not grind flush the front side of
the weld joints.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 255 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
256 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 190: Vertical frame welds n The vertical sections of the frame
should be welded on the outside of
the main frame.

[Link] Frame and Plate Retention

n The deflector plate is rapidly cooled by the exhausted gas. It must be held in the frame
in a way to allow for the thermal contraction.
n In seismic regions, the fasteners used to fix the frame to the wall must be suitable.
- Minimum tensile load of 5 kN each.
- Minimum shear load of 2.5 kN each.
Fig. 191: Deflector plate retention n The deflector plate is retained in the
frame by 4 x screws and locking
nuts.
Minimum size and length of the
UP

screws is M8 x 30 mm).

Deflector plate

Frame

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 256 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 257

Fig. 192: Wall and plate fixing points n Use a minimum of 4 x anchor screws
to secure the frame to the building
or structure.

3.9.3 Mobile Systems Quench Line Design

[Link] Mobile System Overview

n The design rules described for static installations will also apply to mobile trailers.
n The acoustic de-coupler supplied with the magnet system.
n The horizontal adaptor is also supplied with the magnet system.
n The quench tube fitted by the MTM (mobile trailer manufacturer) must be straight,
hydraulically smooth tube sections. Smooth bends and a diffuser as shown in
( Fig. 194 Page 259) can be used.
n The MTM can substitute some or all of the straight tube for flexible bellows. This will
avoid misalignment and act as expansion joints.
n Any changes or new designs must be approved by SMT.
n A new magnet design fitted into a trailer must have an approved quench line.
n New MTM must submit to SMT drawings of their mobile quench line for approval.

 The flexible section must be installed nominally straight. It must not be bent in a way to
replace an elbow.

n Support the weight of the quench line from the main structure of the trailer.
n Do not put stress on the quench line supports with the thermal contraction.
n When the mobile trailer is parked for normal operation:
- Restrict access to the quench line by 3 m (10 feet) each side.
- Restrict access by 6 m (20 feet) vertically above the outlet..
- Helium gas must not be vented directly across walkways or where gas might enter
open windows.
n A warning label must be clearly visible by the quench line outlet..

 The cold gas must not be allowed to blow directly onto a window..

n Fit galvanic isolation at the magnet end as described for fixed site installations.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 257 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
258 3 Preparation for installation

n The quench line must be fully insulated with the materials listed for static systems.
When escalation of a mobile installation is required:
n The quench calculator tool must be provided.
n The escalated acceptance sheet must be provided.
n Photographs must be provided.

[Link] Quench line Configuration in Mobile Trailers

Fig. 193: Mobile trailer configurations

 To stop rain and snow ingress a ‘plenum’ box must be fitted.

Option 1 The quench line runs straight from the de-coupler into 1 x elbow.
Option 2 3 x bends.
Both options ensure vertical entry into the plenum box.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 258 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 259

Fig. 194: Horizontal Adaptor and Acoustic De-Coupler

(1) Horizontal Adaptor (Mobile conversion kit)

(2) Acoustic De-coupler
(3) Extended syphon (Mobile conversion kit)

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 259 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
260 3 Preparation for installation

Fig. 195: Fully Insulated Quench Line

(1) Insulated Quench line

(2) Extended Syphon Run Along the Side Wall
(3) Warning label

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 260 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Preparation for installation 3 261

Fig. 196: Typical Quench Line Outlet to Atmosphere

(1) Warning label

(2) Typical outlet fitted by the Mobile Trailer Manufacturer

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 261 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
262 4 System connections

4.1 SRS connectivity

 The project manager has a central role in the connectivity which is mandatory for
Siemens MR Systems.
Before a system can be connected, the technical environment must be prepared.
The SRS planning guide and the regarded checklists (SRS or product checklist) will
help you to answer all necessary questions.

Refer to the SRS Documents which are available under the following URL link: ( SRS


Tool Kit, [Link]
languagecode=en))
It is absolutely essential and mandatory to prepare the site for Remote Services.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 262 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 System connections 4 263

4.2 Cable properties

 Proper cable routing is absolutely essential for obtaining good image quality!

The cable set length identifies the "free cable length" as from connection point to con‐
 nection point! The cable length is not the distance between the components! You have
to consider the cable feeding!

The total cable length consists of the cable length required between the components.
The free cable length is the length between the exit points for the cables at the compo‐
nents.

When planning the final location of the system components, do not exceed the maxi‐
 mum distance as determined by the cable length. Take into consideration the required
additional length for routing the cables, e.g., through a cable tray at the ceiling.

 Adjust the openings (i.e., wall, ceiling) to the size of the cable connectors

4.2.1 Bending radius

Tab. 41 Bending Radius

Name 2NK6 770 (active) 2NK6 771 (passive)

[mm] [mm]
primary circuit > 300 > 220
RFPA > 130
He-compressor > 120
GC / Filter Panel > 180

Tab. 42 Bending radius RB

Cable type Bending radius RB [mm] Comment

Gradient cable ≥ 135 n.a.
Transmitter RF cable ≥ 120 when bent once
Transmitter RF cable ≥ 360 when bent several times

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 263 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
264 4 System connections

Fiber optic cable ≥ 150 n.a.

Fiber optic cable for pa‐ ≥ 45 n.a
tient supervision

4.2.2 Cable separation

 Separate the three different cable types from each other. The cable duct may not
be installed across the magnet area. If necessary, install additional cable trays. Do
not combine all cables together
n The cables are routed via cable trays or ducts. Install the cable tray to achieve the dis‐
tance of 300 mm between the cable types (see table “Cable Separation”).
n In general, the cables are routed from the top of the cabinet. The cables can be routed
in cable ducts to the top part of the cabinet.
n The minimum bending radius for gradient cables, RF cables and fiber optic cables has
to be maintained.

Cable separation
Gradient cables RF transmit cables, Fiber optic cables,
RF receive cables power cables, sig‐
nal cables
1 Gradient cables - 300 mm 300 mm
2 RF transmit and re‐
300 mm - 300 mm
ceive cables
3 Fiberoptic cables,
power cables, 300 mm 300 mm -
Signal cables
4 Water hoses,
300 mm - -
pressure hoses

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 264 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 System connections 4 265

Fig. 197: Cable duct configuration, example

Separate the three different cable types from each other. The cable duct may not be in‐
 stalled across the magnet area (false ceiling). If necessary, install additional cable trays!
DO NOT COMBINE ALL CABLES TOGETHER!

Fig. 198: Cable tray position

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 265 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
266 4 System connections

The left over cable length must not be rolled into loops at any time. Use a "meandering"
 technique for the remaining cable length. Never store remaining cable length at the
magnet!

Fig. 199: Cable routing

4.2.3 Door switches at the RF room


All doors of the RF room have to be equipped with a door switch.
(In the case of several doors, the switches have to be connected in series.)

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 266 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 System connections 4 267

4.3 List of fix points

The cables cannot exceed a total length of 20.0 m (outside RF room + inside RF room)
due to technical restrictions. The available cable sets are fulfilling this requirement.

 Cables extended beyond the max. limit (>20m) can cause problems with, e.g., the elec‐
tromagnetic compatibility.
The available cable sets are designed for a total cable length of maximum 20.0m.

The gradient cable's physical length inside the examination room is shorter than the
physical length of the other system cables.
Due to the position of the RF penetration panel in relation to the magnet and the used


type of cable feeding, the length of the selected cable set may not be suitable!
With all cable sets, the following is valid:
The cable set length identifies the "free cable length" as from connection point to con‐
nection point! The cable length is not the distance between the components! You have
to consider the cable feeding!

4.3.1 System cable connection

 The cables must not exceed a total length of 20.0 m (Examination Room + Equipment
Room) due to technical restrictions.

 The magnet ramp cables are permanently connected and must be accessible from the
service side of the magnet!

Available cable sets

Set no. Examination Room Equipment room
Cable length [m]
System cable Gradient cable System cable
Gradient cable [m]
[m] [m] [m]
1 8.0 7.0 1.5 3.5
2 8.0 7.0 13.0 14.2
3 10.0 9.0 1.5 3.5
4 10.0 9.0 13.0 14.2
Water hose length valid for all cable sets [m]
from: to:

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 267 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
268 4 System connections

Available cable sets

ICS-passive RF penetration
15.0
panel
ICS-passive ECA 4.3
ICS-passive Primary water
supply 5.0
(on-site)
RF penetra‐ Magnet
15.0
tion panel
Pressurized helium line length valid for all cable sets [m]
Helium Com‐ Cold head
pressor (Magnet) 20.0
(ICS)
Optional
ICS-active 1 External fan unit
2 20.0 / 40.0 3

1. Option
2. Option only available with ICS-active.
3. Optional a total of 40m

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 268 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 System connections 4 269

[Link] System cabling ICS-passive (standard configuration)

Fig. 200: System connection ICS-passive

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 269 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
270 4 System connections

Tab. 43 System cabling ICS-passive

System cabling ICS-passive

Pos. from: to: length [m]:
1 On-site power distribution ECA to be provided
panel on-site
2 ICS-passive ECA n.a.
31 ECA RF-penetration panel 1.5 / 13.0
42 RF-penetration panel Magnet 6.5 / 8.5

1. Dependent on the ordered cable set.

2. Dependent on the ordered cable set.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 270 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 System connections 4 271

[Link] System cabling ICS-active (optional)

Fig. 201: System connection ICS-active

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 271 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
272 4 System connections

Tab. 44 System cabling ICS-passive

System cabling ICS-active

Pos. from: to: length [m]:
1 On-site power distribution ECA provided on-
panel site
2 ICS-active ECA 4.2
31 ECA RF-penetration panel 1.5/ 13.0
42 RF-penetration panel Magnet 6.5/ 8.5
53 ICS-active External fan unit 20/ 40

1. Depending on the cable set ordered.

2. Depending on the cable set ordered.
3. Standard 20m, optional additional 20m which results in 40m total.

[Link] System cabling console components

Fig. 202: System cabeling ECA to operating console

Tab. 45 System cabling ECA to operating console

System cabling ECA to operating console

Pos. from: to: length [m]:

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 272 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 System connections 4 273

System cabling ECA to operating console

1 ECA Operating console MRC 23.0
2 ECA Alarm box 23.0
3 Alarm box Operating console MRC 15.0
4 Operating console Satellite console MRSC 15.0
5 ECA RF-room door switch 20.0

Signal cable length

from: to: Cable length [m]:
Operator room:
ECA 23.0
Mouse 4.0
Host computer Keyboard 4.0
MR monitor 3.0
Intercom central unit 3.0

Power cable length

from: to: Cable length [m]:
Operator room:
ECA 23.0
Host computer 3.0
Line Distribution 1 Intercom central unit 1.5
MR monitor 3.0
Switch MRSC2 1.8

1. Line power distribution multiple socket outlet

2. Option

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 273 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
274 4 System connections

Fig. 203: ECA satellite console; RF-room door switch cabling

MRSC Host PC environment (Option)

If the operator room is used as a patient preparation room, and the MRSC is located in‐


side this room a patient, or other persons which are not members of the operator team,
must not be able to reach the MRSC console within 1.5 m for safety reasons.
The MRSC Host PC will not be supplied with electrical power from the ECA cabinet.

Power requirements MRSC

Voltage 115 V to 230 V +/- 10%

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 274 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 System connections 4 275

Power requirements MRSC

Frequency 50 or 60 Hz +/- 1%
Connection value 1.8 kVA

4.3.2 System water hose connection

The water hose set is part of the cable set! All couplings are part of the delivery volume.

For the initial filling of the secondary water circuit a industrial/process water connection

 has to be in the range of 20.0 m distance from the ICS cabinet.

Do not connect to drinking water systems!

Fig. 204: Water filling

[Link] ICS-passive configuration (standard)

 The on-site primary water supply pipes have to be prepared with a 1 inch female thread
for connecting the delivered adapter for the primary water hoses.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 275 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
276 4 System connections

Fig. 205: Water hose connection ICS-passive

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 276 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 System connections 4 277

Tab. 46 ICS-passive secondary water hose connections

ICS-passive secondary water hose configuration

Pos. from: to: length [m]:
1 Primary water circuit (provi‐ ICS-passive 5.0
ded on-site)
2 ICS-passive ECA 4.5 1
3 ECA RF-penetration panel 15.0 2
4 RF-penetration panel Magnet 15.0 3

1. The ECA cabinet and the ICS-passive cabinet are mounted together! ECA left position, ICS-passive right po‐
sition.
2. Can be cut to length.
3. Can be cut to length.

 The ( Fig. 206 Page 278) is showing the configuration of the Secondary Water Hoses
from the ICS to the penetration panel.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 277 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
278 4 System connections

Fig. 206: Secondary cooling water hose kit

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 278 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 System connections 4 279

Tab. 47 ICS-passive secondary water hose connections

ICS-passive primary water hose configuration

Pos. from: to: length [m]:
1 Primary water circuit ICS-passive 5.0
(provided on-site)
On-Site On-Site primary water sup‐ ICS-Waterhose
adapter ply

Tab. 48 ICS-passive secondary water hose connections

ICS-passive primary water hose adapter (kit)

Part Number from: to: used in
10432883 On-Site primary water supply ICS Passive waterhose U.S.A. 1
10432884 On-Site primary water supply ICS Passive waterhose R.O.W 2

1. Adapter DIN inch DN28 to 1 NPT thread, pair

2. Adapter DIN inch DN28 to G1 straight thread, pair

 The on-site primary water supply pipes have to be prepared with 1 inch female thread
for connecting the delivered adapter for the primary water hoses.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 279 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
280 4 System connections

Fig. 207: System Water Connections; ICS-passive (standard configuration)

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 280 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 System connections 4 281

 The ( Fig. 208 Page 282) is showing the configuration of the on-site water supply ho‐
ses to the ICS-passive cabinet.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 281 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
282 4 System connections

Fig. 208: On-site primary water supply to ICS-passive water hose kit

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 282 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 System connections 4 283

 The on-site primary water supply forward and return pipe has to be equipped with 1 inch
female pipe threads.

 Shut-off valves have to be installed at the on-site water supply pipes (forward and re‐
turn). This is to perform service on the ICS cabinet.

The forward and return pipe between the local chilled water supply and the ICS-passive
has to be identified with labels. The location of the labels has to be at least at the con‐
 nection points of the chiller and refilling connections. The contents of the labels have to
comply with local regulations and have to contain the following information: flow direc‐
tion and medium (e.g., water/glycol)

[Link] ICS-active water hose connection

Fig. 209: ICS-active with external fan unit

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 283 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
284 4 System connections

Tab. 49 ICS-passive secondary water hose connections

ICS-passive secondary water hose configuration

Pos. from: to: length [m]:
1 External fan unit ICS-active 20 / 401
2 ICS-active ECA 02

1. Standard length is 20m, optionally available are additional 20m which results in a total of 40m.
2. ECA cabinet and ICS-active cabinet are mounted together. ECA right position, ICS-active left position.

4.3.3 System pressurized helium hose connection

 The pressurized hoses (from helium compressor to cold head) delivered with the system
are 20.0 m long, this applies to each available cable set!

[Link] Configuration with ICS

Fig. 210: High and low helium pressure lines; SEP, cold head

Cable length
No. Component Cable length [m]:

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 284 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 System connections 4 285

Cable length
1 Cold head
2 RF filter plate
Helium compressor (inside
3
ICS cabinet)
4 high/low pressure lines
20.0
5 high/low pressure lines
6 power line inside exam. room 15.0
7 Power line inside exam. room 15.0

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 285 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
286 5 Technical data

5.1 General information

5.1.1 General classification

Protection Class I
Applied parts
Patient table Type B
Local coils Type B
ECG electrodes Type BF
IP protection class according to IEC 60529 IP XO
The MR system is not intended for operation in
areas prone to explosion (e.g., highly flammable
Explosion protection
mixtures of anaesthesia gases with air or oxygen
or nitrous oxide).
Operating mode Continuous operation with short-term load
Sterilization method (receptors) Gas sterilization
Disinfection receptors / system components Disinfectants without alcohol, ether

5.1.2 Power requirements

For detailed information, refer to: ( Power requirements / Page 286)

Nominal value Tolerance1

380, 400, 420, 440, 460, 480V 3-
Voltage range +10% / -10%
phase and ground
Line to line unbalanced -- max. 2%
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz +/- 1 Hz

1. For all line conditions (e.g., power supply under voltage from the power plant) including maximum volt‐
age drop according to the connection value.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 286 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Technical data 5 287

Recommended Connection Momentary Internal line

System fuse rate value power impedance
100 A (NH-
ECA + ICS-active </= 45 kVA 65 kVA < 200 mOhm
Type)
100 A (NH-
ECA + ICS-passive </= 40 kVA 65 kVA < 200 mOhm
Type)

5.1.3 Air conditioning

For detailed information, refer to: ( On-site air conditioning installation / Page 170)
Tab. 50 Room climate specifications

Examination room Equipment room Control room

Evaluation room
Room temperature +18˚C to +22˚C +15˚C to +30˚C
Temperature gradient n.a. </= 3.0 K/5 min. n.a.
Barometric pressure 700 to 1060 hPascal 1
Relative humidity 40% - 60% 40% - 80%
Absolute humidity < 11.5 g/kg
Heat dissipation to air 3.0 kW 3.0 kW 2.0 kW

1. 700 hPascal is equivalent to a height of about 3000 m above sea level.

5.1.4 Primary water specifications

For detailed information, refer to: ( On-site water installation / Page 166)
Tab. 51 Water quality specifications

Central water supply to ICS-passive

pH value 6-8
Hardness < 250 ppm CaCO3 (calcium carbonate)
< 14˚ dH (German hardness)
Water to be used Tap water for initial filling 1
Chlorine gas concentration chlorine portion < 200 ppm
Filtration 500 μm 2
Water pressure max. 6 bar

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 287 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
288 5 Technical data

Pressure loss Across ICS-passive < 1.0 bar

Anti-freeze concentration 40% / 60%
(ethylene glycol / water)

1. Standard tap water is good enough to fill the water circuit!

2. The installed strainer does apply to this value.

5.1.5 RF shielding

RF shielding
RF room attenuation 1 > 90 dB
at 15 MHz -128 MHz
for Co-Siting >100dB

1. The specifications of the RF room attenuation has to be maintained across the RF room and its lifetime.

5.1.6 Noise emission

Tab. 52 Noise value

Examination room Equipment room Control room

Acoustic noise emission
</= 75 dB(A) 1 </= 65 dB(A) </= 55 dB(A)

1. Average value across 8 hours.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 288 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Transport and Storage conditions 6 289

6.1 Transport and storage specifications

Damage to the magnet system will occur through incorrect handling or being exposed to
 excessive loads. The magnet must only be transported and handled under the conditions
specified in this procedure.

 The magnet can be shipped and transported worldwide with or without liquid heli‐
um. Maximum helium level during shipping: 95%.
 The magnet is classified as “Dangerous goods” as defined by the ADR, IMDG and
IATA codes and their requirements. Liquid helium is classified under UN1963 (Heli‐
um, refrigerated liquid).
 Transportation of the system containing liquid helium must be in accordance with
the appropriate national and international codes.

6.1.1 Mechanical transport conditions

Using an air-ride truck with or without a shipping pallet the following maximum peak ac‐
celeration measured at the magnet mounting points during transportation shall not ex‐
ceed:
n 5.0g vertical shock load applied to the cryostat mounting points.
n 2.0g horizontal shock load applied to the cryostat mounting points in any direction.

 Shock is defined as a dynamic force with duration of no more than 0.5 seconds.

 Transportation of the system containing liquid helium must be in accordance with the
appropriate national and international codes.

[Link] Road Transport

 Road transport is allowed up to 15.000 miles.

 Road transport may be with or without an approved shipping pallet. Without NO
shipping pallet, the magnet must be supported using transport beams.
 Road vehicles must be fitted with air ride suspension, whether or not a shipping
pallet is used.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 289 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
290 6 Transport and Storage conditions

 CAUTION
Transportation vibration and fatigue
Failure to observe the following may result in permanent internal damage being
caused to the MRI magnet.
 Always transport a magnet using vehicles fitted with air ride suspension.

 Road vehicles must be suitable for the intended usage, be properly maintained at
all times, and comply with all local laws and regulations.
 Relevant requirements of the ADR code shall be satisfied.
 The vehicle and operator must be approved by Siemens.

 CAUTION
Transportation for Mobile MRI magnets
Failure to observe the following may result in permanent internal damage being
caused to the MRI magnet.
 This specification does not constitute acceptance for use as part of a mobile
system.
 Mobile magnets require a specific trailer design for continuous road transpor‐
tation.

[Link] Air transport

 Air transport is allowed up to 30.000 miles.

 If air transport is used for any section of the route, an approved shipping pallet
must be used for the entire transportation process.
 Relevant requirements of the IATA code must be satisfied.

[Link] Sea shipment

 Sea transport is allowed up to 30.000 miles.

 If sea shipment is used for any section of the route, an approved (magnet system
related) shipping pallet must be used for the entire transportation process.
 Relevant requirements of the IMDG code must be satisfied.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 290 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Transport and Storage conditions 6 291

[Link] Rail Transportation

 Rail transportation is not allowed!

 Transportation through the channel tunnel (UK to France) is permissible if:

 The system is mounted on an approved air ride truck. The air ride suspension may
be inactive.

[Link] Magnet specifications

Transport and storage specifications - magnet

Acceleration amplitude 2 m/s2 (2 - 100 Hz)
Peak acceleration 5 g vertical, 2 g horizontal
(20 ms time period)
Ambient temperature -25˚C to +60˚C
Relative humidity 10% to 95% non-condensing
Atmospheric pressure 20 kPa to 106 kPa

[Link] System components Specifications

Transport and storage specifications for the system components

Acceleration amplitude 2 m/s²(2 - 100 Hz)
Peak acceleration 5 g vertical, 2 g horizontal
(20 ms time period)
Ambient temperatur -25˚C to +60˚C
Relative humidity 10% to 95%
Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 105 kPa

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 291 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
292 6 Transport and Storage conditions

[Link] Lifting and Handling

Lifting the magnet must always be conducted by personnel who are trained in handling
components and medical equipment of this size and weight.
Lifting during transportation including the final movement onto the installed site must

 be performed using a suitable sized crane or forklift capable of lifting the full magnet
weight.
Suitable straps or chains capable of lifting the full magnet weight must be used. The
straps or chains must be secured to the magnet lifting points using the four shackles
supplied and fitted to the magnet.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 292 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Transport and Storage conditions 6 293

6.2 Transport route

 All transport activities including delivery of the magnet and the system components to
the MR suite may be performed by a licensed carrier only.

6.2.1 Requirements for the transport route

n Prior to requesting the services of a licensed carrier, the project manager and the ar‐
chitect/construction engineer have to determine the floor loading of the transport
routes and the temporary storage areas.
n The architect/construction engineer has to confirm in writing that the floor loading of
the transport routes/storage areas selected will suffice for moving the magnet and the
system components.
n It is the responsibility of the carrier to obtain information concerning the various
transport routes before the actual transport.

[Link] Issuing the order

n The order for transport has to be issued in writing to the licensed carrier selected and
has to contain the following data and documentation (in addition to such general in‐
formation as a list of the components to be shipped):
- Copies of the transport routes/storage areas selected
- A copy of the certificate attesting to the weight capacity of the floor
- Final destination of transport (to give the carrier enough time to obtain information
regarding methods of transport and transport routes)
- The weight and dimensions of the components to be transported
n Actual transport
- The project manager is responsible for the availability of the transport equipment to
be used
- The carrier is responsible for the type of transportation and auxiliary tools used

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 293 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
294 6 Transport and Storage conditions

6.3 Transport dimensions

6.3.1 Overview of Shipping dimensions of the components

[Link] Magnet

ESSENZA
Fig. 211: Magnet dimension (Lateral view)

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 294 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Transport and Storage conditions 6 295

Fig. 212: Magnet dimension (Front view)

Overall height 2162mm

Overall width 2263mm
Total length 1516mm
Total weight 5320kg

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 295 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
296 6 Transport and Storage conditions

ESSENZA DOT
Fig. 213: Magnet dimension of ESSENZA Dot (Lateral view)

Fig. 214: Magnet dimension of ESSENZA Dot (Front view)

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 296 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Transport and Storage conditions 6 297

Fig. 215: Magnet with PTAB dimension of ESSENZA Dot (Left view)

Overall height 2179mm

Overall width 2300mm
Total length 1816mm
Total weight 5320kg

[Link] ECA & ICS cabinet

Overall height 1980 mm

Overall width 650 mm
Total length n 1750 mm (Passive ICS)
n 1950 mm (Active ICS)

Total weight 1130 kg (With passive ICS)

1285 kg (With active ICS)

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 297 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
298 6 Transport and Storage conditions

[Link] Filter plate

Overall height 550 mm

Overall width 823.6 mm
Total length 1179 mm
Total weight 75 kg

[Link] Patient Table

Overall height 918 mm

Overall width 1066 mm
Total length 2426 mm
Total weight 270 kg (Without vertical motor)
304 kg (With vertical motor)

6.3.2 Magnet
The following illustrations and examples indicate the minimum distances for transporting
the magnet.

Transport dimensions of the magnet

Magnet transport di‐ Magnet delivered inside Min. opening for magnet
mension transport frame. transport
Height 2360 mm 2243 mm 2360 + 200 mm
Width 2350 mm 2558 mm 2350 + 200 mm
Length 1450 mm 2861 mm 1450 + 200 mm

Tab. 53 MAGNETOM ESSENZA delivery dimension

Delivery di‐ Transport di‐ Magnet di‐ Magnet di‐ Magnet di‐
mension mension mensio in‐ mension mension
cluding frame without without rear
in mm and cover frame; Stop- cover
Choc re‐ Almost no
moved clearence!
Lenght 1650 1450 1477 1477 1448

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 298 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Transport and Storage conditions 6 299

Delivery di‐ Transport di‐ Magnet di‐ Magnet di‐ Magnet di‐
mension mension mensio in‐ mension mension
cluding frame without without rear
in mm and cover frame; Stop- cover
Choc re‐ Almost no
moved clearence!
Width 2550 2350 2263 2163 2163
Height 2560 2360 2150 2097 2097

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 299 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
300 6 Transport and Storage conditions

[Link] Example of local tranport

Fig. 216: MAGNETOM ESSENZA transport frame

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 300 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Transport and Storage conditions 6 301

Fig. 217: MAGNETOM ESSENZA transport example

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 301 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
302 6 Transport and Storage conditions

Fig. 218: MAGNETOM ESSENZA transport example

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 302 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Transport and Storage conditions 6 303

Fig. 219: Minimum accessible MAGNETOM ESSENZA transport example

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 303 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
304 6 Transport and Storage conditions

Fig. 220: Impossible MAGNETOM ESSENZA transport example

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 304 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Transport and Storage conditions 6 305

Fig. 221: Impossible MAGNETOM ESSENZA transport example

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 305 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
306 6 Transport and Storage conditions

[Link] Freight container

Fig. 222: Transport frame

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 306 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Transport and Storage conditions 6 307

Fig. 223: Transport frame

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 307 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
308 6 Transport and Storage conditions

Fig. 224: Transport frame

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 308 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Transport and Storage conditions 6 309

Fig. 225: Transport frame

[Link] Roof hatch size

 The roof hatch/opening size should be min. 100 mm larger than the transport dimen‐
sion.

 For bringing in the magnet through the ceiling, the ceiling opening must have the
following dimensions: 317 x 240 cm. Patient table dismounted: 180 x 240 cm. The
lateral safety distance is 5 cm.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 309 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
310 6 Transport and Storage conditions

6.3.3 System components

Transport dimensions of the ECA cabinet

Height 1990 mm
Depth 653 mm
Length 957 mm

Transport dimensions of the ICS-passive

Height 1990 mm
Depth 653 mm
Length 819 mm

Transport dimensions of the ICS-active

Height 1990 mm
Depth 653 mm
Length 1019 mm

 The transport dimensions are shown without transport devices.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 310 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Transport and Storage conditions 6 311

6.4 Weights and dimensions

Outside dimensions of
crate Gross weight / net
System components weight
L x W x H mm
Magnet 2860 x 2100 x 2250 5350 kg/4350 kg
ECA cabinet + ICS-active 2230 x 910 x 2260 1580 kg
ECA cabinet + ICS-passive 2024 x 910 x 2260 1440 kg
ICS accessories 1000 x 1000 x 750 220 kg
RF penetration panel 1280 x 990 x 800 136 kg
External fan unit 1650 x 1250 x 800 150 kg
Cable set 1200 x 840 x 820 246 kg
Console components 1020 x 910 x 720 92 kg
Console accessories 1300 x 890 x 360 79 kg
System components 2100 x 1000 x 1230 210 kg
Patient table with vertical drive
2600 x 1160 x 1130 531 kg
(option)
Patient table 2600 x 1160 x 1130 480 kg
Surface coils 1970 x 1480 x 1590 188 kg
Customer site box 1600 x 950 x 710 115 kg
Cover kit 1 2000 x 1000 x 1600 160 kg
Cover kit 2 2000 x 1000 x 1180 200 kg

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 311 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
312 7 Options

7.1 General information

 All available options are published in the Price Book. Refer to the Price Book for detailed
ordering information

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 312 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Options 7 313

7.2 UPS system PW 9130G 3000T-XLEU

If an older UPS and distribution box (with another material no. as below) was used, it
must always be replaced, together with the distribution box, by the UPS Power‐
ware PW 9130G 3000T-XLEU♦.
Distribution box:
 n Tim systems:
material no.: 8114717
n all other systems:
material no.: 10433233

When installing an MRSC console, UPS Powerware PW 9130G 3000T-XLEU♦ does not
support the MRSC PC. You must install a standard PC UPS or additional UPS Power‐

 ware PW 9130G 3000T-XLEU♦ (without a cable set) to supply the MRSC PC or a Leonardo
workplace computer.
The UPS Powerware PW 9130G 3000T-XLEU♦ is used for the MRC Host computer.

7.2.1 Function
Using a UPS (uninterrupted power supply) ensures that the system computer is protected
against all types of interferences.
In most cases, local voltage supplies are sufficient for satisfactory operation.
However, modern processor-controlled configurations require highly reliable sources. The
Powerware PW 9130G 3000T-XLEU♦ meets these requirements. The Power‐
ware PW 9130G 3000T-XLEU ♦ is the standard UPS for the MRC Host PC and Imager PC.

The PW 9130G 3000T-XLEU♦ including the Siemens cable set supports the Host PC and


the Imager PC.
For other options, e.g. MRSC, procure an additional UPS system, preferably a
PW 9130G 3000T-XLEU♦.

7.2.2 Technical data

Technical data of Powerware 9130G 3000T-XLEU♦

Weight in kg 36
Dimensions of housing H x W x D in mm 3251 x 214 x 412
Output in kVA 3.0
Backup time in min. at max. load 5 min. with built-in batteries
Temperature +0C to +40C

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 313 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
314 7 Options

Technical data of Powerware 9130G 3000T-XLEU♦

Relative humidity 5% - 90% noncondensing
Acoustic noise <50 dBA2

1. 346 mm with feet

2. at 1.0 meter distance

7.2.3 Order information

 The item numbers and descriptions of the PM (Price Book) apply!

Order information
Consult the Price-Book for details!
Type Material no.:
SSMR delivery BU_MR delivery
Powerware 9130G 3000T-XLEU♦
144 13 710
(including wall bracket)
Battery module
144 13 711
PW 9130G-3000T-EBU
Siemens cable set 144 13 709 144 18 625
Siemens cable set Mobile Configuration 144 13 709

 The distribution box for Powerware 9130G 3000T-XLEU♦ is part of the delivery volume
for the Siemens cable set.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 314 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Options 7 315

7.2.4 Installation

[Link] Installation

Overview
Fig. 226: UPS configuration for the host computer

1
GPA ACC

(1) Distribution box

(2 ) To ACC/EPC X112; CCA X103

NOTICE
The Powerware 9130G-3000T-XLEU♦ Output Voltage is configured to 208 V for
delivery.
Failure to observe the following safety information may result in equipment dam‐
age.
 Adapt the output voltage of the Powerware to 230 V.

If a small UPS (for the host PC) is supplying the system, pressing the EPO button inter‐
 rupts the power supply between the “Distribution Box” and the CCA (Symphony) or ACC
(TIM-Systems) cabinet.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 315 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
316 7 Options

Wiring Diagram

Verio systems are not delivered with an EPO (Emergency Power Off) switch as standard
equipment; instead, they have a main system switch.

 If an EPO (Emergency Power Off) switch is installed, the UPS Powerware 9130G-3000T-
XLEU♦ must be turned off, the EPO is activated simultaneously.
When the main system switch is turned off, the UPS Powerware 9130G-3000T-XLEU♦
must also be deenergized.

Only for Verio systems:


If no EPO switch is used, the contact of the distribution box must be bridged in the loca‐
tion, refer to ( 1/Fig. 227 Page 317).
For all other (non Tim) systems, refer to ( Fig. 228 Page 319).

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 316 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
Restricted
© Siemens, 2007
L1
L2
L3
For Tim Systems

25A

09.14
K1

Non/heating

M4-[Link].02
230V Non/heating 230V
apparatus outlet
apparatus plug
Kaltgeräte Gelb Kaltgeräte Gelb
Steckdose yellow Stecker yellow
Fig. 227: Distribution box (material no. 8114717)

H1 H2
X3 X4
N
PE
EPO Connection

CS SD MR
X1 L1 L1 N N Lz Nz PE Terminal X2 1 PE 2 3 PE 4 5 PE 6 7 PE 8

Page 317 of 392

7
[Link], [Link], L1.rück, N.rück, PE Emergency Switch EPO (1-4)
1

Cable
UPS “INPUT” UPS “Load 2”
ACC, X 112
Options 7

MAGNETOM
317
318 7 Options

(1) A total of four EPO switches can be connected to the terminal block X2. Jumper the respective EPO terminal block
with a bridge if no EPO is connected to that terminal

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 318 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
Restricted
© Siemens, 2007
L1
L2
L3
N
PE

25A
For all other Systems

09.14
K1

F1 B16

M4-[Link].02
Fig. 228: Distribution box (material no. 10433233)

X3 X4 yellow
yellow

CS SD MR
230 V 230 V

IEC H1 IEC H2

Page 319 of 392

connector connector
L1 L1 N N LZ NZPE female male
X1 X2 1 PE 2 3 PE 4 5 PE 6 7 PE 8

Connection Emergency Switch

to UPS and
from UPS
Options 7

MAGNETOM
319
320 7 Options

Installation and Cabling

 For additional information, please refer to the documentation for the components of
UPS Powerware 9130G 3000T-XLEU♦ supplied with the system.

Fig. 229: Cable set

n Deenergizing the system.

Tim systems: All other systems:

Fig. 230: Distribution box (material no. 8114717) Fig. 231: Distribution box (material no. 10433233)

1 2

(1) X1 (cable connection to ACC/EPC X112) (1) X1 (cable connection to CCA X103)
(2) X2 (connection terminals for EPO switches) (2) X2 (connection terminals for EPO switches)
(3) F1 16A

n Connecting the line voltage to terminal strip X1 (1).

Cable identifications Designation of distribution box Terminal strip X1

[Link] L1
[Link] N
L1.rück Lz

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 320 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Options 7 321

Cable identifications Designation of distribution box Terminal strip X1

N.rück Nz
PE PE

Fig. 232: Distribution box

(1) X1
(2) X3
(3) X4
(4) To ACC/EPC X112

Fig. 233: Distribution box n Connecting the distribution box to

the Powerware 9130.
Distribution box X3 - UPS INPUT
Distribution box X4 - UPS LOAD2
n Connecting the distribution box to
the ACC / CCA cabinet.
Distribution box X1 to
- ACC X112 (Tim systems)
- CCA X103 (all other systems)

(1) X1 to ACC/EPC X112; CCA X103

(2) X3 to UPS INPUT
(3) X4 to UPS LOAD2

Connecting the supplied cables:

Distribution box UPS

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 321 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
322 7 Options

Connecting the supplied cables:

X3 “INPUT”
X4 “LOAD2”

Fig. 234: UPS Powerware 9130i 3000T-XLEU (rear side) n Switching the system on.
n Switching on the Powerware UPS.

1 2

(1) Output LOAD2 to distribution box X4

(2) INPUT to distribution box X3

[Link] Start-up

NOTICE
The Powerware 9130G-3000T-XLEU♦ Output Voltage is configured to 208 V for
delivery.
Failure to observe the following safety information may result in equipment dam‐
age.
 Adjust the output voltage of the Powerware to 230 V.

Adjust the output voltage to 230 V, refer to the Powerware User Guide supplied with the
system. The output voltage adjustment is described in the user settings.
n Adjust the output voltage from 208 V to 230 V.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 322 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Options 7 323

Concluding Tests
A distinction is made between systems with an EPO and those with a main system switch
(only with Verio systems).

Systems with EPO

If a small UPS (for the host PC) is supplying the system, pressing the EPO button inter‐
 rupts the power supply between the “Distribution Box” and the CCA (Symphony) or ACC
(TIM-Systems) cabinet.

 The UPS system must be switched off. The UPS system must stop supplying the MR
system with voltage once the EPO switch is activated.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 323 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
324 7 Options

7.3 In-room MRC

7.3.1 Functionality
Trackball-only driven operation and evaluation console, placed in the examination room
close to the patient. Operates in parallel to the MR main console
The In-Room MRC provides the same NUMARIS operating user interface as the main MRC
and runs in parallel to it. The exchangeable trolley allows the In-Room MRC to be freely
positioned in the examination room. It is used in MR-guided intervention procedures and
for MR-guided biopsies. The In-Room MRC enables visualization of the user interface
( measurement parameters), images with the biopsy needle next to the patient and al‐
lows control of the start of measurement without the need to get out of the examination
room. All necessary display and measurement functions are started via the In-Room MRC
mouse. The video signal from the graphic board is split via the video distributor on the In-
Room LCD display and the MRC flat screen. Both monitors have the same resolution and
simultaneously display the same image.

7.3.2 Component

Technical data
Weight ≤ 63 kg
Height 1250mm to 1540mm
adjustable
Width 550mm
Depth 600mm

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 324 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Options 7 325

Fig. 235: In-Room MRC

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 325 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
326 7 Options

Fig. 236: Connecting the cables at the RF-filter plate

7.3.3 For planning purposes, the following are important:

If the In-room MRC is installed, install the transformer at the RF filter plate inside the ex‐
amination room. A special position is prepared at the RF filter plate. The RF filter plate al‐
ready includes the necessary bolts. The RF filter to be used is Z30/Z31.
If for any reasons (e.g., sound reduction, thick wall), the cut-out in the wall/sound reduc‐
tion construction for the filter plate is exactly the same dimensions as the outer dimen‐
sions of the filter plate, do not mount the transformer to the filter plate!
In this case, the transformer has to be mounted in close vicinity of the RF filter of the filter
plate. The cable length is 700 mm.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 326 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Options 7 327

7.4 Patient supervision unit

7.4.1 Functionality
Patient video monitoring is required during the MR examination, if operating personnel
cannot visually monitor the patient through the RF room window in a suitable manner. In
principle, the video camera should be installed on the front wall of the RF room (as seen
from the magnet). Installation on the back wall is possible, but results in a more limited
viewing area due to the shorter distance between the magnet and the wall.
Due to the extensive travel range of the patient table toward the back wall of the RF
room, ensure there is sufficient light behind the magnet (e.g., spot light or similar) to en‐
able proper visual patient monitoring.

7.4.2 Components

[Link] Color LCD monitor

 Special video camera integrated in the back magnet cover ring for observing the
patient. The color LCD monitor may be positioned at the operator’s console or at a
convenient wall location (optional wall mount required ( Optional Patient Video
4 display wall mount / Page 329)).

Technical data
Weight ≤ 3.8 kg
Cooling convection
Power consumption 20 W max.
Operating temp. +15˚C - +30˚C
Humidity (below the dew point) 40% - 80%
120/230 VAC +/- 10% automat‐
Power supply
ic selection
Limit value for magnetic flux density to ensure operat‐
max. mT
ing safety
Size (height X width X depth) in mm 277 x 294 x 80

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 327 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
328 7 Options

Fig. 237: Patient Video 4 Display

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 328 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Options 7 329

Fig. 238: Patient Video 4 Display

Optional Patient Video 4 display wall mount

 The display wall mount is an option and has to be ordered separately if required!

Patient video 4 wall mount

Part number 71 07 944

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 329 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
330 7 Options

Fig. 239: Patient Video Display 4 Wallmount

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 330 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Options 7 331

Fig. 240: Patient Video Display 4 Wallmount

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 331 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
332 7 Options

Fig. 241: Pateinet Video Display 4 Wallmount

Fig. 242: Patient Video Display 4 Wallmount

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 332 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Options 7 333

7.5 Stepping transformer for Passive Cooling

7.5.1 Application
The stepping transformer is absolutely necessary for all nominal voltage/frequency combi‐
nations other than 400V/50Hz or 480V/60Hz.
A stepping transformer has to be ordered with all other nominal voltage/frequency com‐
binations.
Stepping transformer for special mains voltage. E.g. Necessary in Brazil, South Korea, Cay‐
man Islands.

7.5.2 Ordering information

Ordering information Ordering details

Type Material number
Consult the Price Book for or‐
Adaptation transformer 56 72 378
dering details
Cable set 10836962

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 333 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
334 8 Mobile-specific requirements

8.1 Health & Safety Guidelines for Mobile Serviceability

8.1.1 Introduction

[Link] Purpose of this document

This document defines the health and safety requirements for service personnel that car‐
ry out magnet service tasks on ESSENZA magnet systems that are installed in Mobile trail‐
ers.
The requirements in this document are based on the risk assessment carried out by the
SSMR department.
The first Mobile trailer design must be type tested and validated against this requirement
specification prior to delivery to the end customer.
The trailer design must be type tested and validated for each type of magnet installed in
the Mobile trailer. Serviceability requirements vary depending on the type of magnet and
the type of MRI system the trailer is used with.

[Link] Definitions

Mobile Mobile trailers are typically (the US version) 2.59m (8.5 feet) wide by
14.63m (48 feet) long and are towed by tractor units.
Transportable Transportable trailers are typically (only available in the US) 3.66m (12
feet wide by 18.29 (60 feet) long and are towed by tractor units.

[Link] Acronyms and Abbreviations

CSE Customer Service Engineer

EU European Union
HHDU Hand Held Display Unit
HSC Headquarters Support Centre
LHe Liquid Helium
MRT Magnetic Resonance Tomography
MSUP Magnet Supervisory
MTM Mobile Trailer Manufacturer
MTO Mobile Trailer Operator
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer (e.g. Hitachi, Toshiba, Siemens)
PE Patient End
PPE Personal Protective Equipment
SE Service End

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 334 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 335

SMS Siemens Medical Solutions

SMT Siemens Magnet Technology
US United States

[Link] References
[1] Health and Safety Audit of Mobile MRI Magnet Serviceability

8.1.2 Typical Service Procedures

The following service procedures are typical for mobile magnets. This work will generally
require full access to the magnet turret and sidesock.
n Cold head replacement
n Helium filling.
n Syphon replacement.
n Quench valve inspection and bursting disc replacement.
n Magnet system de-icing.
n Thermal cycle.
n Replacement of venting and general access to the turret.

 For general safety it is always recommended that all mobile service is performed by two
CSE's.

8.1.3 Roof Hatch Requirements

[Link] Internal Access

Access via a roof hatch that can be opened from within the trailer is the preferred option
for service operations on the magnet as it represents the least risk to personnel working
on the magnet.

[Link] External Access

Access via a roof hatch that can be opened from outside the trailer is the least preferred
option because the CSE must climb over the trailer roof to open the hatch. It is strongly
recommended that only the Internal Access method is adopted.

[Link] Roof-hatch General Requirements

The roof hatch must comply with the following requirements:
n Hinged so that it opens on the outside edge.
n A locking device must be fitted to retain the hatch door safely in the opened position.
n The Hatch must be RF tight unless an inner RF hatch is used.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 335 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
336 8 Mobile-specific requirements

n It must be possible to repeatedly open and close the hatch without compromising the
RF-shielding.
n Must have a water tight seal.
n It must be possible to operate the internal locking device using one lever from either
end i.e. the patient table end or the service end.
n When stood at the Patient End of the magnet in front of the patient table column, the
ceiling above and up to the service turret area must be easily demountable
( Fig. 243 Page 337).
n The area immediately in the vicinity of the hatch must be free of obstructions so that a
service engineer can gain free access to the service turret & the roof hatch.
n The area around the cold head must be kept clear of cabling, gas lines fire extinguish‐
ing systems etc to allow access to the top of the magnet and provide sufficient room
to exchange the cold head.
n The roof hatch opening must be free of obstructions such as shield support structures,
but if additional reinforcing is required that obscures the hatch and prevents access to
the cold head and service turret area this must be easily demountable.
n The roof hatch must be offset over the front of the magnet to give sufficient room to
climb up onto the service platform via a ladder whilst still providing access to the
quench valve.
n The manufacturer must ensure that the roof of the trailer is strong enough to allow
two CSE's , (i.e. 260kg) with their tools and spare parts (70kg) to work safely around
the roof hatch.
n The safety harness anchor points should be positioned along the inner edge (towards
centre of roof) of the hatch opening.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 336 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 337

Fig. 243: Roof Hatch Position

Equipment Room
Operation Room
Examination Room

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 337 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
338 8 Mobile-specific requirements

[Link] Service Tool Requirements for SMT

SSMR must ensure that the following service tools are available:
n A service platform that can be:
- secured safely on top of the magnet with access via a ladder from within the trailer
and in combination with a roof hatch.
- positioned as close as possible to the base height of the cold head.
- capable of supporting one CSE (i.e. 130kg) and any tooling (70kg) that he/she may
require.
- easily attached to the magnet for service.
- easily assembled and dismantled for transportation.
n A ladder that can be:
- firmly attached to the platform or magnet to allow a CSE to safely transfer from the
magnet to platform.
- easily assembled and dismantled for transportation.
n An additional drip tray that can:
- prevent cryogen splashes onto the electronics & wiring.
- prevent dropped tools or components falling behind the covers.
- Be easily assembled and dismantled for transportation.
n Coldhead sidesock blanking plate.
n A cover for the roof hatch that will:
- provide weather protection when the roof hatch is open.
- ensure adequate ventilation.
- provide fixing for extra illumination, i.e.: an inspection lamp.
- be easily assembled and dismantled for transportation.
n A lifting device that can:
- lift and lower the cold head during exchange in a controlled manner.
- be easily assembled and dismantled for transportation.
- allow the cold head to be safely exchanged by one CSE.
n PPE to include safety harness, hard hat, gloves and visor.
n A pumping adaptor that can be connected to the pump out port whilst the magnet is
fixed in position in the Mobile trailer.

[Link] Service Requirements for the Local Service Organisation

The local service organisation that carries out the magnet service must ensure the follow‐
ing:
n Safety lines and equipment issued to their CSE's have a regular inspection and testing
protocol.
n The CSE is provided with the appropriate mobile service tools via Siemens CSML.
n Provide a means for safely lifting the service tools and parts to the trailer roof (fork lift,
cherry picker, crane or another method).

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 338 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 339

n Provide their CSE with a step ladder to enable the false ceiling to be removed before
setting up the service platform.

 The service platform & associated kit (harnesses, etc.) can also be used with the exter‐
nally opening hatch.

8.1.4 Further Safety & Serviceability Requirements

[Link] MTM Requirements

n Minimum ceiling height => 2300mm over the service turret. It must be possible to
gain access to the magnet side sock and service turret for cold head and siphon servic‐
ing.
n Access to the lower pump out port is required. This will require that there is enough
space to allow the removal of the lower magnet looks cover and end covers on the
pump out port side of the magnet.
n Access to the magnet turret, cold head, quench pipe and venting must be made possi‐
ble via the service hatch. It must be possible to exchange the helium syphon and cold
head.
n Must be possible to read the hand held device supplied with the SSMR Mobile conver‐
sion kit. To achieve this, the magnet MSUP unit must be positioned at the rear of the
trailer.
n The extended syphon must be securely stored on the rear wall of the trailer using the
brackets supplied with the siphon kit in the SSMR Mobile Conversion kit.
n The helium filling operative can easily remove the syphon from the wall and connect
to the door frame
n The fill procedure should be performed without having to connect syphons within the
confines of the trailer. That is, the syphon connection must be made outside the rear
of the trailer.
n Safe access to the rear of the trailer via removable steps or foot holes / step plates

[Link] SSMR Requirements

n Pumping equipment is available that can be:
- Fitted with the magnet installed in the trailer so that the OVC can be vacuum pum‐
ped.
- Be easily assembled and dismantled to the magnet by one CSE.
- Be easily assembled and dismantled for transportation.
n A Mobile helium syphon kit
n The end of the syphon can be secured at the rear trailer door for filling (by means of
an adjustable clamping bracket on the door frame) and can be firmly fixed for trans‐
portation in the corner of the trailer.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 339 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
340 8 Mobile-specific requirements

8.2 General Information

 The MAGNETOM ESSENZA MR systems were originally developed for static use.
However, all components are designed and tested for integration as a mobile MR
system.
 Because the MR system is based on a released "static" system developed and tested
according to Siemens Medical Solutions MR Quality System, only the mobile-spe‐
cific requirements are listed in this section of the Planning Guide. The static system
has already incorporated the requirement of mobile use for the components. The
mobile specific components (Siemens Mobile Kit, identified in the Price Book) have
been validated on a mobile system.

 The planning advice in the Planning Guide document must be followed for the Mobile
installation unless specified in the register “Mobile-specific requirements”.

The principal architecture of MAGNETOM ESSENZA with the respective components is

 given as technical constraints for the mobile system. All the valid specifications have to
be taken into account for the mobile system. The free cable length is the length between
the exit points for the cables at the components.

Siemens approved accessories are MR compatible. They are not tested for mobile use. If
 the mobile customer wants any of these then the mobile manufacturer is responsible for
proving compatibility

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 340 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 341

8.3 Project Management of the MRI system into mobile trail‐

ers
 The Siemens Project Manager is responsible for the mobile system installation
process as well as for static system installation. He should arrange the delivery
schedule of the system and the mobile specific components which are identified in
the Price Book (needed for the installation) with the trailer manufacturer. He also
has to arrange the magnet, system installation and start-up. He is responsible for
the related installation tools and for ensuring that the differences between a static
system and the mobile system are implemented as described in the Planning
Guide and Installation Manual.

Tab. 54 To obtain the contact details for the preferred mobile trailer manufacturers

Address
Contact: Wang Ai Ping
E-mail [Link]@[Link]
phone: +86(0755)26733720
fax: +86(755) 26733603

 The SIEMENS Project Manager assigned to the installation is responsible for co-ordinat‐
ing the MRI installation, start-up tune up and final handover like fixed site installations.

The trailer manufacturer based in the USA normally install the MRI system themselves
 (after their personnel have received the necessary training). If preferred the trailer man‐
ufacturer could use our mechanical installation vendor to install the system.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 341 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
342 8 Mobile-specific requirements

8.4 Mobile Safety Requirements

All Siemens Medical Solution components have to be fixed mounted. None of the com‐

 ponents must move during transportation/travel of the trailer.

The mobile manufacturer has to secure the e.g. cabinets adequately to the floor.

The trailer must be attended at all times, or locked to inhibit unauthorised entry.

 This requirement should be passed on to the customer / operator via e.g. the “Trailer op‐
erations manual”.

 Established codes and/or national codes or guidelines of the country where the system is
delivered to, have to be taken in concideration.

8.4.1 Controlled area

Due to the fact that the trailer is executed with magnetic shielding, the 0.5mT line re‐
mains within the width of the trailer (US: 0.2m/8 inch away from the outer wall). There‐
fore, additional safety-provisions outside (sideways) the trailer are not necessary.


Clearly readable signs and appropriate pictographs have to be posted on the trailer wall
stating the following (as for content):
Warning: Strong Magnetic Field, pacemaker patients keep clear.
Service within the 0.5 mT zone prohibited for implant wearers if the magnet is at field.
The area under the trailer is of special concern.

See also: ( Controlled access area / Page 11)

 If a patient walkway is constructed from e.g. an existing building to the trailer, it
must be made out of non-ferrous material. The interface of the e.g. walkway to
the trailer wall has to be made out of a soft (e.g. rubber) material.

8.4.2 Magnet Quench Vent


Do not use other than the specified material for the quench vent!
See chapter ( Quench Line Design Instructions / Page 194)

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 342 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 343

The magnet Quench vent must be designed in accordance with the Planning Guide sec‐
tion ( Quench Line Design Instructions / Page 194) and as per configuration shown in
( Mobile Systems Quench Line Design / Page 257).

 The Quench Vent Check-list must not be filled out for mobiles due to the fact that this is
done during type test since the designe is the same for all systems.
The exhaust should be flush with the external surface of the trailer and covered with the
specified stainless steel mesh to prevent ingress of ‘foreign bodies’ etc.

In the case of a massive release of cold helium gas into the examination room, it must be
either possible to open the door between the examination room and the console room
 or to open an emergency hatch from the outside to release the helium gas. The doors
should open to the outside. It must be possible to open the rear door to the outside in an
emergency case.

The quenchline needs to be insulated as recommended in the ( Quench Line Design In‐

 structions / Page 194) section and made to look professional i.e. this might be seen by
the patient and so should have the same professional finish as the rest of the examina‐
tion room.

[Link] Helium venting

The opening direction of the RF door has to be to the outside of the RF room or an alter‐
native means has to be provided to ensure that pressure built up during a quench, when
the venting fails to work adequately, will not prevent the RF door of the examination

 room from being opened.

E.g., due to constructional reasons, the RF door opening direction is to the inside of the
RF room, a flap with the size of 700 mm x 700 mm (for Mobile) has to be integrated into
the RF room door!

By using a suitable design as well as maintenance plan, the manufacturer of the RF cabin
has to ensure that the following operate without fail:

 the door locking, especially the door handle and locking mechanism so as to secure con‐
tinous access to the patient in the examination room for emergency care and evacua‐
tion.

8.4.3 Oxygen Monitor

 A separate Oxygen monitor is required in the examination room.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 343 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
344 8 Mobile-specific requirements

The Oxygen Monitor is mandatory and must include an audible and visual alarm which
can be monitored from the operators console.

 The mobile manufacturer is responsible for the supply and installing the monitor.
The operator is responsible for maintaining its function during operation (Mainenance
and Service).

8.4.4 Non-magnetic materials

All items which are available in non-magnetic materials should be selected to reduce
hazards or potential harm to both personnel and equipment. Particular attention should
 be paid to screws, nuts, washers and small fasteners as these items can easily be lost in‐
to the magnet. Larger magnetic items which must be removed for/during service must
be clearly marked as being magnetic.


The trailer should be constructed substantially from non-magnetic materials.
The specific requirements are described in the Siemens Magnet Technology MOB 001.

8.4.5 Labels
 The trailer has to be labeled indicating the presence of a static magnetic field.
The labels must be fitted to the trailer walls by the mobile manufacturer. The location of
the labels should be at “eye-height” of all four walls of the trailer at the highest fringe
field position.
The contents of the labels must be: “Warning, strong magnetic field! Pacemaker hold‐
ers keep clear min. 20cm (8”).
A warning sign with the following contens has to be fitted underneath the trailer:
“Introduction of ferromagnetic objects under the trailer is forbidden for service per‐
sonnel and others if the magnet is at field”.

8.4.6 Personnel service access

 Suitable safety devices to be incorporated to allow for safe service access.
For example:
n Possibility to fix the rear doors in the open position.
n Possibility to fix in the open position of the service hatche.
n Anchorage / mountings on the trailer for any service platforms if applicable.
n Anchorage for safety harnesses if applicable.

 See also the SMT safety & serviceability document. The trailer manufacturer must com‐
ply to the relevant aspects of this.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 344 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 345

The trailer has to be designed in a way which doesn‘t allow to fall or slip easily under‐
 neath the trailer. Underrun protection devices have to be installed. Special care for chil‐
dren has to be taken.

[Link] Service access

 To perform service, maintenance and the replacement of all parts must be possible
with the magnet built into trailer.
 Service access to the cold head must be possible to exchange/maintain the cold
head without removing the magnet

Extreme care must be given to the selection of the mounting locations of both the Sie‐
 mens equipment and trailers support equipment. Free and clear access to all equipment
will help to prevent extended downtime situations in the field.

It must be possible to remove the gradient coil through the rear trailer door.
Dimension of Gradient coil:

 Diameter: 810 mm
Length: 1235 mm
Weight: 600 kg

8.4.7 Fixation of local coils

There must be the possibility for the safe fixation of e.g. local coils and other patient posi‐
tioning components.

 Local Coils must be secured during transportation.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 345 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
346 8 Mobile-specific requirements

8.5 Mobile System Overview

The standard configuration is ICS-passive.

 The primary and secondary water circuit of the water cooling circuite has to be filled
with the required amount of ethylene glycol (60% water / 40% ethylene glycol).

All Siemens Medical Solution components have to be fixed mounted. None of the com‐

 ponents must move during transportation/travel of the trailer.

The mobile manufacturer has to secure the e.g. cabinets adequately to the floor.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 346 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 347

8.5.1 Mobile system components

Fig. 244: MAGNETOM ESSENZA Mobile System components

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 347 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
348 8 Mobile-specific requirements

[Link] Mobile System configuration overview; example

The following infomation shows an example of a trailer configuration and design and
may differ to other trailer manufacturer designs.
Fig. 245: MAGNETOM ESSENZA Trailer configration example

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 348 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 349

Fig. 246: MAGNETOM ESSENZA Trailer; Rear view

[Link] Component weight

Component Net. weight (app.)

Magnet 4350 kg
Patient table 120 kg

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 349 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
350 8 Mobile-specific requirements

Component Net. weight (app.)

ECA/ICS 1030 kg
E-Box 240 kg
Mobile kit accessories 60 kg
RF Filter panel 130 kg
Cable set 150 kg
Accessories and dokumentation 150 kg
Water hoses 70 kg
Console components 50 kg
app. net. total weight ~ 6200 kg

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 350 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 351

[Link] Magnet

Position / orientation / fixing of the magnet

Fig. 247: E-Box location

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 351 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
352 8 Mobile-specific requirements

Fig. 248: Magnet fixation point

588.0¡À1.0mm 588.0¡À1.0mm
417.0±1.0mm

417.0±1.0mm
402.0±1.0mm

402.0±1.0mm

588.0¡À1.0mm 588.0¡À1.0mm

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 352 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 353

 Make sure that all pre installation tasks have been completed on the magnet before the
installation into the trailer.

 The magnet shall be installed with the axis of the bore tube parallel to the length of the
trailer, and symetrical about the internal and iron shielded side walls.

The magnet must be bolted securely to the trailer bed using the holes provided in the
magnet feet for the purpose with bolts or other attachments that prevent movement of
 the magnet relative to the trailer in any axis (suitable diameter holes must be used, not
slotted holes). Suitable vibration tolerant locking devices should be used to maintain
tightness throughout the life of the system.

 Do not use slotted holes or holes with a larger diameter for securing the magnet.

 The center of gravity of the magnet must act within 20 mm of the axial position
within the trailer shielding as provided by Siemens Magnet Technology and the
lateral center of the trailer shielding.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 353 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
354 8 Mobile-specific requirements

8.6 Mobile Specific System Components

 The following changes are necessary to adapt static systems for mobile use.
The “Mobile Set 011” part no is 10352193. It consists of:

Part No Item
10352193 Mobile set 011
consisting of:
10352390 ESSENZA Mobile E-Box assembly
10353087 Mobile Adaptor Plate Assembly
10165137 MSUP mobile kit
10499005 RF conversion cable kit
10165152 PTAB conversion cable mobile kit
10498501 ESSANZA MOBILE MAGNET CONVERSION KIT
7758522 Helium remote display 2654
10276795 Helium remote display 2654
10276795 Sign set 1 (Mobile)
10499297 E-BOX Packing
8084035 Product identification label
10165007 CPC connector
10019301 Water Tube
8086063 GB70-85 SCREW M6x16
8085750 Normal Plain Washer 6(GB/T95-85)
8103322 External LockWasher 6 GB(T862.2-87)
3099546 ETHERNET SWITCH 5 Port 1Gb

8.6.1 ESSENZA Mobile Magnet Conversion Kit

The conversion kit is consisting of the following components:
Tab. 55 ESSENZA mobile conversion kit contens

10498501 ESSENZA mobile magnet conversion kit

consisting of:
10498502 MOBILE MOUNTING KIT
10498503 MOBILE SYPHON KIT

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 354 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 355

10109300 AVANTO/ESPREE Hi Alt. Mobile Kit

10109301 Pressure Gauge Kit Mobile Unit
10498504 MOBILE SHOCK LOG KIT
10498511 MOBILE QUENCHLINE KIT

8.6.2 Unique Mobile components

Item no. Item

10353239 Carrier plate 011 mobile set
10353243 filter plate 011 mobile set
10499270 ECA&ICS mobile set
10165154 System cable for mobile 011
10499050 Grad_coil_011_M_kpl
10352167 Cover Assembly 011 mobile
10499657 Mobile PMU display_011

[Link] Mobile components at the rear of the magnet

Oxygen monitor
See: ( Oxygen Monitor / Page 343)

Additional EPO switch

 An additional emergency power off (EPO) button has to be installed at the magnet
service end on the opposite wall to the E-Box.

Fig. 249: Magnet Stop, EPO

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 355 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
356 8 Mobile-specific requirements

Additional ERDU button

 An additional magnet stop (ERDU) button has to be installed at the magnet service
end on the opposite wall to the E-Box.

Fig. 250: Magnet Stop, EPO

Magnet pressure gauge

 The magnet pressure gauge must be moved from the magnet and must be fitted
onto the trailer wall. That is on the RH wall when the magnet is viewed from the
service end. It must be possible to visual see the pressure gauge from the magnet
service end without removing any looks covers.

Fig. 251: Pressure gauge

Helium syphon
 It must be possible to connect the fill end of the syphon to the trailer rear door
frame ready for filling.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 356 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 357

The syphon will be be installed in the factory but the final fixation and mounting has to
be done during the MRI installation into the trailer. Therefore a support bracket has to be
installed to prevent the He-Syphon from moving during the transport of the trailer.
Wall fixing brackets will be supplied with the Syphon Kit but the fixing method to the
wall (trailer) has to be specified by the mobile manufacturer.
The syphon will need to be stowed on the side wall during normal use. But needs to be
easily accessible so that it can be brought down to the rear door for He-filling.
 It must not be free to cause spikes.
It also needs to be covered during normal use e.g. inside a cupboard above the E-box
The helium syphon must be accessible from the rear side (magnet sevice end) when
opening the main door to connect the syphon and fill without entering the trailer during
helium transfer.
The helium syphon should be covered e.g. in a cable duct. The use of the helium sy‐
sphon must not be affected by the cover.

Helium fill connection point

 It must be possible to connect the helium syphon and fill the magnet with liquid
helium without entering the trailer during helium transfer. The magnet pressure
gauge must be possible to see from the service end without removing any looks
covers./

Fig. 252: He fill line connector

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 357 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
358 8 Mobile-specific requirements

Liquide Helium content

 The magnets are at least 93% full of helium before they leave the factory. The
agreement with SMS MR is that the magnets will arrive in Erlangen with =>81%
helium. Also SMT have an agreement with the IMDG for shipping via sea and IATA
for transporting via air that the magnets can be 93% full. This covers the magnet
from SMT to the customer site. Once the magnet is installed the helium level is the
responsibility of the purchaser (owner) of the MRI system. For fixed sites the mag‐
net can be filled to 100%. This is also the case for mobiles. However in the case of
mobiles, if the owner of the mobile wants to transport the trailer via sea or air
then it is their responsibility to agree with the local transportation authority
whether there are any special constraints that they must conform to e.g. helium
level.

8.6.3 Magnet cover for mobile

[Link] Magnet cover parts

Fig. 253: Mobile Cover Components

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 358 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 359

[Link] Magnet front view

Fig. 254: MAGNETOM ESSENZA Mobile with E-box; front view

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 359 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
360 8 Mobile-specific requirements

[Link] Magnet rear view

Fig. 255: MAGNETOM ESSENZA Mobile with E-box; rear view

8.6.4 E-Box
The electronic components, normally mounted on the left side cover frame of the mag‐
net, will be mounted at the rear of the magnet (magnet service end) in an Electronic
Board Assembly.
For the mobile system installation those components are installed into an additional cabi‐
net, the E-box.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 360 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 361

Fig. 256: E-Box Mobile Dimension

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 361 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
362 8 Mobile-specific requirements

Fig. 257: E-box components

(1) PTAB control box

(2) RFIS
(3) RCCS
(4) TALES
(5) BCCS
(6) Patient fan
(7) MSUP battery
(8) MSUP
(9) Remote display

E-Box dimension and weight

Height Depth Length Weight
1200mm 421.5mm 1352mm 240kg

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 362 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 363


The E-box must be raised from the floor using support feets.
This ensures that e.g. no water can get into it and the doors can be opened always.

There must be sufficient space between the rear of the E-box and inside wall at the rear
of the trailer to allow the Hand Held meter to be connected to the E-box, see

 ( Fig. 258 Page 364).

This is important as the person filling the magnet needs to be able to see the helium lev‐
el whilst stood outside at the rear door.

 The max. distance from the magnet to the E-box is determined by the cables.
 The system connections between E-box and magnet, and E-box and RF filter panel
have to be covered e.g. with a cable duct.
n Receive RF cables will be longer.
n Heat dissipation of components to air must be guaranteed.
n Function of the components in the magnetic fringe field must be guaranteed.
 The trailer manufacturer must ensure to provide cable conduit with a top cover in
white, so that the cable going into the top and side of the E-box at the rear of the
magnet can be covered.
This is so that the finish at the rear of the magnet was as clinical as the patient
table end of the magnet in case a patient goes into the magnet head first.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 363 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
364 8 Mobile-specific requirements

Fig. 258: E-Box location

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 364 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 365

8.7 Trailer design and construction

 The following items must be given a high priority during the design and materials
selection phase of the project.
 The power and water requirements are defined in the following sections:
( On-site electrical installation / Page 147)
( On-site water installation / Page 166)
 For the MR-system built into the trailer, the environmental conditions as specified
in this document and the complete Planning Guide have to be used as a reference.

If the customer wants Q-engine and agrees not to upgrade the system to SQ-engine, the


Q-engine infrastructure can be installed.
If the customer wants SQ-engine of if he wants Q-engine with the possibility for a future
upgrade to SQ-engine the SQ-engine infrastructure has to be installed.

The trailer manufacturer must provide suitable vibration isolation between e.g. the air
 conditioning system and trailer so that it does not cause adverse affects to the image
quality.

8.7.1 Trailer construction

[Link] Trailer equipment

 All mobile systems must be equiped with the following components:

n Diesel generator
n Air conditioner
n Water chiller
n Patient lift
n Fifth wheel air ride
n Air ride suspension
n Braking system
n Leveling jacks
n Wheels and cap nuts
n RF door
n Fire suppression system
n Humidifier system
n Power converter

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 365 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
366 8 Mobile-specific requirements

n Oxygen monitor

[Link] Trailer dimensions

 It must be possible to install a fully configured magnet including noise damping

into the trailer.

The trailer dimensions listed below are the minimum dimensions required to install a
 fully configured MAGNETOM ESSENZA magnet worst case dimensions based on previous
projects!

Tab. 56 Trailer dimensions

Trailer dimensions for examination room

Width minimum 2280mm
Height minimum (inside of the trailer ceiling) 2493mm
Height minimum to false ceiling 2325mm

Tab. 57 Trailer installation access dimensions rear loading

Trailer installation axxess dimensions for rear loading

Width minimum (rear loading) 2207mm
Height minimum (rear loading) 2350mm

Tab. 58 Trailer installation access dimensions roof loading

Trailer installation axxess dimensions for roof loading

Width minimum (roof loading) 2222mm
Length minimum (roof loading) 3099mm

[Link] Service hatches


For planning-information on service hatches refer to the following document:
[Link].000.00


For cold head and He syphon removal a service hatch is required!
This can either be a roof hatch (preference) or a side hatch.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 366 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 367

If, e.g., a service hatch/door is installed there must be the possibility to install/fix hand
rails! The side hatch should be opened from the outside and servicing performed within
the hatch area.
 If access to the side hatch is external, then safety features (e.g., safety rails, harness fix‐
ing points) must be installed.
Check with local safety requirements!

The area around the cold head must be kept clear of cabling, gas lines, fire extinguishing
systems etc to allow access to the top of the magnet and provide sufficient room to ex‐
change the cold head which is limiting the service height to < 2300mm.

 Thus if 2300mm ceiling height is not possible then a stepped ceiling may have to be
considered that is ideally above the quench line at the rear can be considered. This is so
that easy access to the the service turret from the rear is possible and so that the quech‐
line can be routed horizonatly.

Cutting the Looks Covers must be avoided as these are an integral part of the validated
magnet and play a key part to the noise reduction for MAGNETOM ESSENZA systems. If
the false ceiling is lowered below the minimum fixed site room height of 2350mm then

 particular attention to is required to ensure that the covers on the magnet, especially
around the turret can be removed.
The ceiling therefore needs to be easily demountable and the positioning of fixed hard‐
ware such as air conditioning ducting considered for service access of the magnet.

[Link] Patient table transport support bracket

 The transport bracket has to be installed during transporting / moving the mobile
traile.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 367 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
368 8 Mobile-specific requirements

Fig. 259: Table transport bracket

 Refer to the installtion instructions for mobile systems!

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 368 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 369

Fig. 260: Installation Instruction

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 369 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
370 8 Mobile-specific requirements

[Link] Magnetic iron shielding

Siemens Magnet Technology have designed a generic shield configuration for the USA
trailers (for a trailer outside width of 4016mm / 102") and another generic design for the
European (rest of the world) trailers (for a trailer outside width of 3937mm / 100"). The
USA generic design has the option of inside out or outside in lay up of the iron sheet.
An extremely important aspect of the iron shielding is that it must be decoupled from
the outside shell of the trailer. The detailed shielding requirements are described in the
 SMT specification MOB001. The trailer manufacturer must adhere to this design spec
and provide proof of conformance to it.
If the trailer manufacturer ever want to change the shield design after the initial trailer
type testing then they must seek permission to do so via the change control process be‐
tween themselves and Siemens MR. The trailer manufacturer will have to pay for any de‐
sign work required and will have to prove compliance to the the SMT spec MOB001 and
prove that the change is not detrimental to the MRI performance of the system.

The trailer must comply fully with the Siemens Magnet Technology specifications given
 in the documents MS 001 and MOB 001. The mobile manufacturer must provide proof
of conformance to these specifications!

It is extremely important that if a trailer is sold outside of the USA then the 5 Gauss con‐

 tour must be brought within the outside walls of the trailer. The European (rest of the
world) generic shield design can do this. Thus this should be used or Siemens MR should
agree that the US shield design is OK in a particular country.

Any changes to the trailer design that has been type tested with Siemens has to be
 agreed to via the change management system operated between the trailer manufactur‐
er and Siemens MR.

 The tables below show the 5 Gauss limits to which the USA and rest of the world
shield configurations have been designed to to.

US MRI Trailers
fringe field location distances
< 0.2m (8 inches)

beyond the outer side and rear trailer from the trailer wall
0.5mT line 1
walls < 2.44m (8 feet)
in height from the ground

1. 0.5mT = 5 Gauss

MRI Trailers outside the US

fringe field location distances

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 370 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 371

MRI Trailers outside the US

within the trailer wall
within the outer side and rear trailer
0.5mT line 1 < 2.44m (8 feet)
walls
in height from the ground

1. 0.5mT = 5 Gauss

Fringe field distribution for US spec. trailer (worst case)


The unit for the fringe field is shown in the drawings is Gauss.
1 Gauss is 10-4 Tesla

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 371 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
372 8 Mobile-specific requirements

Fig. 261: Shielding View Y/Z-direction

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 372 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 373

Fig. 262: Shielding Viey X/Z-direction

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 373 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
374 8 Mobile-specific requirements

Fig. 263: Shielding View X/Y-direction

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 374 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 375

Finge field table

Tab. 59 Distance from the magnet center in [m]

fringe +X -X +Y -Y +Z -Z
field
200 mT 0.93 0.93 0.94 0.94 1.13 1.13
40 mT 1.25 1.25 1.19 1.19 1.59 1.59
20 mT 1.25 1.25 1.27 1.29 1.83 1.84
10 mT 1.25 1.25 1.36 1.36 2.11 2.11
5 mT 1.25 1.25 1.44 1.45 2.43 2.46
3 mT 1.25 1.25 1.52 1.52 2.68 3.05
2 mT 1.25 1.25 1.58 1.55 2.92 3.05
1 mT 1.26 1.26 1.64 1.61 3.34 3.14
0.5 mT 1.31 1.31 2.29 2.12 3.82 3.49
0.3 mT 1.64 1.64 2.54 2.41 4.25 3.87
0.2 mT 1.84 1.84 2.73 2.62 4.63 4.25
0.15 mT 1.97 1.97 2.84 2.74 4.94 4.55
0.1 mT 2.13 2.13 3.02 2.89 5.42 5.03
0.05 mT 2.35 2.35 3.28 3.16 6.34 5.88

Mobile 0.5mT controlled access area

See also: ( Controlled access area / Page 11)

[Link] Noise emission values

Tab. 60 Noise value

Examination room Equipment room Mobile Control room

Acoustic noise emission
</= 65 dB(A) </= 65 dB(A)
</= 75 dB(A) 1
(average value) (average value)

1. Average value across 8 hours.

 If cold head lines are running through a room, without acoustic damping measures, the
noise in that room will reach 67dB(A).

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 375 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
376 8 Mobile-specific requirements

The above mentioned values allow the mobile operator to determine if the system is


within their local noise specifications.
If not the mobile manufacturer will have to provide extra noise damping in the effected
rooms.

Sound damping

To maximise noise damping of the high- and low He-pressure lines use the insulation
material supplied.
This material has to be installed inside the examination room. The remaining hose also
 has to be fully covered with pipe insulation material. This has to be provided by the trail‐
er manufacturer. Also it is important that any slack (extra hose) is run up and down in as
longer lengths as possible in the ceiling above the equipment or magnet room.
If this is not sufficient then extra insulation material has to be used.

It could be necessary to install sound damping materials between the examination room
 and the operators room and/or between the equipment room and the operators room to
comply with local (system destination) requirements or codes.

[Link] System connections

Only the 10 m/10 m cable set is available for the MAGNETOM ESSENZA built into a trail‐
er!
 Refer to Diagrams ESSENZA M4-[Link].02
(ESSENZA mobile Topsheet /E-BOX)

Magnet ramp cables

 The magnet ramp cables from the magnet to the RF filter panel must be installed perma‐
nentely.

 The mobile manufacturer must provide a route to lay and adequately fix the ramp
cables from the magnet to the RF filter [Link] ramp cable connector has to be
easy reachable from the operators room.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 376 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 377

RF filter panel
 The RF filter panel can be installed in the vertical and horizontal position ( RF Fil‐
ter Panel / Page 55). If required the mobile manufacturer can make an extra angle
bracket (based on the one supplied) out of conductive (stainless steel) material to
connect the gradient power cables to the RF panel on the operators room side.

[Link] Power conditioner

A power conditioner has to be installed in North American trailers only (Not for European
use)!
 The use of a power conditioner is mandatory (Not for European use) since the
mains connection from the hospital to the mobile is feeding all components.

[Link] Chassis / Coachwork

The trailer has to be designed in a way which doesn‘t allow to fall or slip easily under‐


neath the trailer. Underrun protection devices have to be installed especially around the
wheel areas.
Special care for children has to be taken.

The trailer should be constructed substantially from non-magnetic materials. Where the
trailer contains a significant quantity of magnetic material (axles, suspension locations,

 items >5 kg within 2.5 m of the magnet isocenter, etc.) whether for stray field shielding
purposes or as structural elements of the trailer, the design must be verified by Siemens
Magnet Technology prior to magnet installation, commercial details of such verification
to be agreed on a case by case basis.

 Chiller, motors, etc., has to be positioned as far as possible away from the magnet to
guarantee quality assurance (IQ).

[Link] Vehicle suspension

 Refer to Siemens Magnet Technology specification MS 001.

[Link] On-board Diesel Generator

The generator must not be switched on during imaging.

 We do not recommend that you operate the Siemens MRI system with a diesel generator
during imaging (normal operation) due to vibration and its effect on image quality.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 377 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
378 8 Mobile-specific requirements

Each mobile MAGNETOM MRI unit must have an on-board diesel generator capable of
running the air conditioner(s), water chiller, magnet electronic and magnet refrigerator


during transport or while stationary (if not connected to building power supply). The die‐
sel generator should be sized accordingly.
The particular Power requirements for the Siemens MRI system are described in the Plan‐
ning Guide section ( On-site electrical installation / Page 147).

n All high service items such as injector pump, oil filter, fuel filter and starter should be
located on the outward facing side of the generator or easily accessible for service.
The generator must not have to be removed or dismounted to replace any of these
items.
n The oil drain plug or hose should be readily accessible.
n Winter engine block heaters should be factory installed (customer option).
n The engine and generator unit must be mounted to the carrier frame with vibration
dampening mounts.
n While Siemens does not approve scanner operation from generator power, some of
our customers may have reason to do so. In these cases, a larger capacity generator
will be required. It must be sized at the full rated load of both the MAGNETOM and
mobile unit.
n Exhaust from the diesel generator shall be routed away from the fresh air intake of
the air conditioning system.
n Depending on where the trailer is operated the local laws (National, Federal, State
etc.), governing the placement and intended use of the diesel generator shall apply.

[Link] Interior finishing

n All items chosen for interior finishing must meet the following requirements:
- Be readily commercially available.
- Established codes and national codes of the country where the system is delivered
to have to be taken in concideration.
- Be easily cleanable using readily available cleaning agents.
- Must not degrade or decompose from exposure to high humidity levels normally
present within the mobile unit.
- Must not pose any safety, health or injury related risks to the operators or service
personnel.
- Anti-static flooring be used inside the equipment room.
- Must not produce additional dust particles or lint fibers when cleaned or during
transportation and general use.
- Interior color selection must compliment the installed Siemens equipment and be
acceptable to the majority of our customers.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 378 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 379

For storing the system components like surface coils, cushions and patient table accesso‐


ries, a proper storage option has to be provided, e.g., cupboards.
This storage option must be equipped with locking devices to prevent the mentioned
parts from moving during transport.

Host computer dimensions

 The host computer might change in size due to upgrades or revolving updates. For
this reason, it is necessary to prepare the location/position for the host computer
flexible.

Technical details for the host computer

For installing the Host computer in close vicinity to the operator’s console, adequate
space has to be provided.

 The size of components such as the Host PC may change in the future. Thus the trailer
manufacturer should ensure that the fixing devices and space they provide for such
components are designed in such a way that they can be adapted or modified easily to
accommodate future size changes.

For installing the Host computer It is the mobile manufacturer responsibility to install
 locking devices for the operators console components and the computer equipment to
prevent them from moving during transport.

 It is up to the mobile manufacturer trailer to determine where the MRSC console should
be positioned.

Entry doors
n All entry doors and service entries into the interior of the Mobile MR unit must per‐
form the following:
- Established codes and national codes of the country where the system is delivered
to have to be taken in concideration.
- Seal tightly to keep out rain, dirt, road dust and water during washing of the units
exterior, transportation or during general use. Light must not be seen between the
door surface and the weather seal when properly closed.
- Have the possibility to fix them open, especially service doors.
- Have appropriate handles to operate the doors safely.

 It must be possible to remove the gradient coil through the rear trailer door.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 379 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
380 8 Mobile-specific requirements

If steps/ladders are part of the trailer delivery, they must be equipped with hand rails.

 If ladders are required, the fixing point (position) must be identified.

Check with local safety requirements!

Belly "Skirt" compartments

All "skirt" compartments must

n Have interior ceiling mounted lights
n Have door seals which will keep out the following:
- Road dirt, dust, generator exhaust and water during transport
- Water during trailer washing
- Rain, dust and generator exhaust while stationary
- Doors with locks that do not freeze-up or jam during winter months
- Be able to be kept closed during normal daily operation of the unit
- Be heated if the intended use includes water storage, phantom storage or humid
mounting location. This is to prevent freeze damage.

Upgrade ability

All mobile MR trailer vendors must keep in mind that the MR system will undergo several
 upgrades or design changes during the useful life of the trailer. Space should also be
available to increase the capacity of the on board water chiller system, if needed.

Customer options

Space should be available for customer order options such as a gurney, oxygen & suc‐

 tion, MRSC console, DSC console, NCT system, various laser camera"s, etc. These items
must also be field installable at a later time with minimal impact to the customer’s daily
operations.

[Link] Magnet shock logger monitoring

 Mobile shock logger to be permanently attached to the magnet.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 380 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 381

Fig. 264: Shock Logger

Shock logger requirements

1. Permanent power supply 230V; 50/60Hz; 1A

2. Download the data from the equipment room
3. The junction box supplied with the Siemens shock logger kit must be positioned in the
equipment room. It must also be easily accessible by the CSE so that he can connect
his laptop PC to it to download the stored data.
4. Indicator / reset unit supplied with the Siemens shock logger kit must be positioned
where the driver or trailer operator will see the device periodically. For example next
to the building power connection plug ina belly compartment.

Alarm settings

Tab. 61 Shock loggger alarm settings

Alarm settings
X- direction 1.2g
Y-direction 1.2g
Z-direction 3.0g
Wake-up all directions 0.5g

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 381 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
382 8 Mobile-specific requirements

Alarm settings
Examination room temperature +18˚C to +22˚C
Examination room relative humidity 40% to 60%
Examination room barometric pressure 700 to 1060 hPascal

[Link] Data collection

The mileage completed by the trailer must be accurately recorded by a suitable device
 and data made available to Siemens Magnet Technology in support of any warranty
claim or other reasonable circumstance.

8.7.2 Type Test

The trailer must comply fully with the Siemens Magnet Technology specifications given
in the documents MS 001 and MOB 001.

 MOB 001 SAP No.: 101 18 255 EMU 000 00

MS 001 SAP No.: 101 18 256 EMU 000 00
The mobile manufacturer must provide proof of conformance to these specifications!

 The finished mobile must be subjected to an agreed track test to check for problems
such as loose components, chafing cables etc.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 382 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 383

 Stray field measurement (0.5mT line) has to be carried out as per SMT documentation.

 Enclose find a brief information on the [Link] measurement:

Aim:
to measure the stray field contours inside the trailer, to validate the model predic‐
tions.
Equipment:
3-axis Gauss probe, tape to mark out reference grid.
Method:
Mark out transects extending along the magnet axis in both the patient and serv‐
ice ends of the system. Mark intervals of 50 cm along these transects. Measure all
distances along the transects from the magnet iso-centre, defined from the centre
of the bore. Similarly, mark out transects at 50 cm offset on one side from these.
Using a metre-rule or similar, determine the height of the centre of the bore. In a
plane at this height, measure the magnetic field in all three orthogonal directions
at each interval along the transects. The modulus of the field is calculated as the
square root of the sum of the squares of the field values in these three directions.
The measured field iso-lines are to be compared to the calculated [Link] take
spot measurements in 3 axes under the trailer to confirm the predicted ballooning
effect of field, particularly close to critical components (brake circuit pumps, bear‐
ings, etc).

[Link] Type test for trailer compliance to the Siemens MRI System

 Requires validation of the trailer against the SIEMENS MR Planning Guide, Installation In‐
struction and Performance Test.

Before a trailer manufacturer can be used they must of completed successful validation

 of the Planning Guide, Installation Guide and Performance Test for a particular MRI sys‐
tem. SIEMENS MR will then recommend that their trailer can be used with the particular
MRI system validated.

Validation of the planning guide will be described in a test document written by Siemens
MR. Validation will be carried out by Siemens MR & the mobile manufacturer. The major‐
 ity of the validation requires self certifying by the trailer manufacturer. That is the mobile
manufacturer must be able to prove if ever audited that they have incorporated the rele‐
vant sections of the planning guide into their trailer design.

Validation of the Installation Instruction will either be described in a test document writ‐
 ten by Siemens MR or the Installation Protocol will be the basis of the test. The choice
depends at which stage of the new product introduction the trailer is tested at.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 383 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
384 8 Mobile-specific requirements

If the test is based around the Installation Instruction then this will be carried out by Sie‐
 mens MR & the mobile manufacturer. It will involve confirming that the installation is
carried out as described in the Installation Instruction

If the Installation Protocol is used then this will be the responsibility of the trailer manu‐
facturer. This document is a checklist that installation tasks have been completed. This
 will have to be completed for every installation as it is a requirement for handover by the
local SIEMENS Project Manager. If the trailer manufacturer do not install the MRI system
themselves then the installtion company use (e.g. Hegele) will need to do this.

 Validation of the MRI system performance will be described in a test document written
by Siemens MR. Validation will be carried out by Siemens MR.

Before the trailer manufacturer can be used their trailer for the particular SIEMENS MRI

 system has to successfully complete the type test described above. SIEMENS MR will is‐
sue proof of compliance to the trailer manufacturer after successful completion of the
type tests.

After the initial validation any changes which concern fit, form or function must be
 controlled via a change control process between Siemens MR and the mobile man‐
ufacturer.

The mobile trailer manufacturer must ensure that each trailer is handed over to the cus‐
tomer with all user documents, compliance tests etc. for theier trailer and the equipment
they install. For example:

 -Trailer operators manual -Diesel generator-Air-conditoner-Patient lift-Fifth wheel-Air-

ride suspension-Brake system-Wheels and cap nuts-RF room & doors-Fire suppression-12
volt charger system
-etc.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 384 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 385

8.8 Environmental Requirements

 The specifications must be achieved by e.g. the on-board air conditioner, water chiller,
humidifier and electrical power supply.

8.8.1 Specific Mobile Environmental Requirements

The main chiller and air conditioning system supplying the helium compressor has to re‐


main “ON” at any time.
If the helium compressor is “OFF” for more than four hours the magnet will start venting
helium gas.

It is recommended to keep the air conditioning system “ON” because the average operat‐


ing temperature will be achieved in a short period of time.
Switching “OFF” the air conditioning system will require more time to achieve the oper‐
ating temperature.

The ICS cabinet is connectet to the ECA which is in turn connected to a permanentely
present power supply (mains box)! This is to ensure the permanent run of the helium

 compressor.
Switching “off” the main trailer power supply must be minimised or Helium boil-off will
happen.

The primary water circuit of the ICS has to be filled with the required amount of ethylene
 glycol (60% water / 40% ethylene glycol) see also ( On-site water installa‐
tion / Page 166).

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 385 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
386 8 Mobile-specific requirements

[Link] Air conditioning

A minimum fresh air exchange rate, related to the examination room volume of eight
(8) times per hour is mandatory.

 Higher fresh air exchange rates might be required due to local regulations or the system
usage.
It is recommended to install fresh air systems with 25% fresh air intake.

 Deflecting the complete air conditioning air out of the trailer is not required for
mobiles because this would incorporate a very difficult design. Also it would
present another possibility of RF interference with an additional opening in the
trailer.
It would be needed to design and install a properly wave guide and there would be
the need to install a fan running during scanning. This would also require the en‐
tire HVAC system on the trailer to be changed. The amount of air exhausted direct‐
ly affects the capacity and demand on the HVAC system.

The air-conditioning must remain on at all times i.e. especially during transporta‐


tion
The air-condition needs to support immediate auto-restart of the cold head com‐
pressor after any power interruption!

The generator for the coldhead assembly power and cooling water has to be in opera‐

 tion during transport. This will guarantee a normal He boil-off during transportation. If
the generator/shore power is not left running/connected, the refrigeration system may
fail prematurely.

 Normal enviromental conditions are required at all times to ensure that the MRI system
is not damaged by cold or heat and that it is always ready to image.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 386 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 387

8.9 On-site preparations for the use of a Mobile MRI

8.9.1 General
The mobile unit does require specific site preparations, provided by the user at each de‐
sired location. The following information is necessary for the placement of the mobile
system at a location. Included in this Planning Guide is structural and electrical informa‐
tion to assist the customer with design requirements. The information herein is provided
to suggest location of the mobile unit and is not for construction purposes.
Construction drawings are the responsibility of the customer and must comply with all es‐
tablished codes and national codes of the country where the system is delivered to, as
well as the trailer manufacturers siting requirements.

8.9.2 Topographic specification

When parked, the MRI unit uses two front hydraulic jacks and two fixed height stands in
the rear, for stabilizing purposes or four fixed height stands if a full size pad is available.

 The axles must be leveled if the trailer is in its operating position.

If any kind of leveling material is used underneath the trailer supports, the same kind
and thickness of this material has to be used underneath the wheels.

8.9.3 Service access

 Service and replacement of all parts must be possible within the trailer unless the side
access hatch option has been used.

n An access way of at least 2 meter in width must be provided along the closed side of
the trailer.
n An access way of at least 2 meters in width must be provided along the entrance side
of the trailer.
n An access way of at least 2 meters in width must be provided behind the rear entrance
doors of the trailer.
n A clear ceiling height of 5.2 meters is recommended for service access, if the trailer is
to be placed inside a building or under an overhead walkway.

[Link] Access consideration

Access consideration must be given to the tractor, the patient lift, the stairs and the belly
compartments, for patient entry, trailer service and helium dewar access to fill the mag‐
net.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 387 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
388 8 Mobile-specific requirements

8.9.4 Support pad

[Link] Recommended support pad size

For operational setup an ordinary flat and horizontal solidly paved parking space is nee‐
ded. For correct horizontal positioning of the unit the horizontal segment of the parking
space (support pad) should be 10 x 3 meters. A total paved area of at least 6 x 20 meters
is recommended for tractor access and patient handling.

[Link] Support pad strength

The support pad strength varies due to established codes and national codes of the coun‐
try where the system is delivered to and soil conditions. The pad should be able to carry
the following weights:

Position Weight
King pin (front) 9t
Bogey (rear) 19 t
Total trailer weight approx. 28 t

[Link] Support pad levelness and flatness

 The support pad must be level and flat to insure proper operation of the mobile MRI unit.

8.9.5 On-site environmental requirements

[Link] Water requirements

The trailer has a humidification system which contains a water storage tank, located typi‐
cally in the front side area (technical compartment). This tank must always contain water
to ensure a specific humidity level. To fill the on-board water tank, a hose connection
should be provided at the outside of the building in the close vicinity where the trailer will
be parked.

The primary and secondary water circuit has to be filled with the required amount of
 ethylene glycol (60% water / 40% ethylene glycol) see also ( On-site water installa‐
tion / Page 166).

[Link] Communication service

Provide communication access at the outside of the building in the close vicinity where
the trailer will be parked. The trailer unit should be supplied with two double UTP connec‐
tors for communication.

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 388 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 Mobile-specific requirements 8 389

[Link] Power requirements

 In a mobile it is not possible for any mobile equipment or MAGNETOM equipment

to be installed before the service line. In a mobile there is one service line, typically
480V 150 or 200 Amp, to the trailer and all components are installed after this.
The coach components such as Air Conditioning and Chiller are however seperated
in the distribution panel. The MAGNETOM equipment is also after the line condi‐
tioner and the air conditioner and chiller are seperate from this circuit.
 For all MR system power and water requirements choose the specifications refer‐
ring to the used system type at the following links:
( On-site electrical installation / Page 147)
The trailer will have a diesel generator for the power supply of the water chiller, cryo-
compressor, air-conditioning and ventilation during transport.
For operational use at the hospital site a 480 Volt / 200 Amp. CEE-form female connec‐
tor is required.
The four wire power cable (3P/G; neutral is not required) from the distribution panel to
the ACC cabinet should, for safety reasons, be connected to a mains breaker. The external
power supply and grounding should comply with established codes and national codes.

Since all of the components (e.g. Magnet, RF-room, el. cabinet, etc.) are boltet to the
 trailer it is not possible to lift the ground by removing the safety ground wires for meas‐
urement.

For US mobile installations a Ground Rod needs to be installed (6-7 feet deep) in close
vicinity to the power outlet of the trailer. A separate safety ground needs to be run to
 connect trailer grounding point and Ground Rod (internal ground wire in power cable is
not sufficient!). The safety ground wire needs to be installed each site the trailer is oper‐
ated at.

This is not the responsibility of the mobile manufacturer.

All specifications apply to measurements at the receptacle pins. Line voltage drops from
 the facility mains to the receptacle must be included in all power calculations; power
range to be in +/- 5% of specified voltage.

It is important that when the Mobile has the SQ-engine that site power is at the required
110kVA connection value. The adaptor must not be used when the Mobile MRI trailer


has the SQ-engine installed.
The mobile manufacturer must state this in the documentaion that they give to the cus‐
tomer. Also the mobile trailer manufacturer must add a label to the adaptor that states
that.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 389 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
390 9 Changes to previous version

The following changes have been made to the previous version:

Link to changes Description of changing Reason for changing
( Glen Dimplex Representa‐ Correction of manufacturer CHARM_MR_00428916
tions / Page 100)
( Magnet seismic anchor‐ New drawing CHARM_MR_00427930
ing / Page 98)
( Mobile Specific System Table Support CHARM_MR_00410329
Components / Page 354)

MAGNETOM M4-[Link].02 Page 390 of 392 © Siemens, 2007

09.14 CS SD MR Restricted
 List of Hazard IDs 10 391

There are no Hazard IDs in this document.

© Siemens, 2007 M4-[Link].02 Page 391 of 392 MAGNETOM

Restricted 09.14 CS SD MR
- Restricted - All documents may
only be used by authorized person‐
nel for rendering services on Sie‐
mens Healthcare Products. Any
document in electronic form may
be printed once. Copy and distribu‐
tion of electronic documents and
hardcopies is prohibited. Offenders
will be liable for damages. All other
rights are reserved.

[Link]/services

Siemens Healthineers Headquarters

Siemens Healthcare GmbH
Henkestr. 127
91052 Erlangen
Germany
Telephone: +49 9131 84-0
[Link]/healthineers

Print No.: M4-[Link].02 | Replaces: M4-[Link].02

Doc. Gen. Date: 09.14 | Language: English
© Siemens Healthcare GmbH, 2007

[Link]/healthineers